JP7118431B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

In the pachinko game machine described in Patent Document 1 below as an example of the game machine, a stage exhibiting a high degree of expectation is selected based on power-on, and the selected stage is displayed on the display screen of the image display device. It is configured. With this configuration, by confirming the stage displayed on the display screen of the image display device, it is possible for the player to be motivated to play the game machine for the first time.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-201058

However, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game first by other configurations, not limited to the configuration performed in the pachinko gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 above. .

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the object is to provide a gaming machine that can motivate the player to play the game first.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
In a gaming machine provided with game control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not a win is made based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition,
The game control means is
It is possible to change to one set value selected from among a plurality of set values with different winning probabilities,
Suggestion notification means capable of performing suggestion notification suggesting that the set value has been changed by the game control means based on power-on,
The suggestion notifying means is
When the suggestive notification is performed, the suggestive notification can be terminated when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times ,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is easier to end the suggestive notification when the game control means changes to a second set value different from the first set value than when the game control means changes to the first set value. is.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game first.

1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment; FIG. It is a perspective view showing the structure of the gaming machine frame provided in the gaming machine. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of a game board provided in the gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of the A portion shown in FIG. 4, and is a view showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the effect control board side of the gaming machine. It is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine according to the comparative example. In a comparative example, it is an electric circuit diagram for explaining electric power supplied between a power supply unit, a payout control board, and a game control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an in-circuit inspection in a comparative example; In this form, it is an electric circuit diagram for explaining the power supplied between the power supply unit, the payout control board and the game control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the time of the in-circuit test|inspection of this form. It is a hit classification determination table. It is the table|surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "1", (B) is a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "2", and (C) is when the set value is "3" (D) is the jackpot determination table used when the set value is "4", (E) is the jackpot determination table used when the set value is "5", and (F) is the setting It is a jackpot determination table used when the value is "6". (A) is a reach determination table, (B) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (C) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table. It is an electric chew opening pattern determination table. (A) is a perspective view showing the game control board and the game control board case, and (B) is a front view showing the game control board and the game control board case. It is an exploded perspective view showing a game control board and a game control board case. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 20B, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 20B. It is a front view showing a game control board and a game control board case. It is a front view which shows a 7 segment display. 4 is a table showing types of operations that can be performed when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a change in the effect mode when a setting confirmation operation is performed after a setting change mode transition operation, a RAM clear switch operation, and a setting confirmation operation; It is a figure which shows the electric circuit around the microcomputer for game control. (A) is a diagram showing the electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in the rotating position, and (B) is a diagram showing the electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in the process of being operated from the rotating position to the standby position. , (C) is a diagram showing an electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in the standby position; It is a rear view of an inner frame. (A) is a diagram showing a case where an error display is executed on the 7-segment display, and (B) is an operation suggestion image on the display screen, an error sound output from the speaker, and a frame lamp and a board lamp. is a diagram showing an error light emission mode of . FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining that the display mode is switched every specific time after the initial display is performed on the 7-segment display; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where the 1st-preceding base, the 2nd-preceding base, and the 3rd-preceding base have not yet been stored. (A) is a set value change lamp turn-on lottery table of the first form, and (B) is a set value change lamp turn-off lottery table of the first form. 4 is a timing chart showing the relationship between a set value change lamp and a variation display counter; It is a figure which shows nine types of production designs (from the 1st production design to the 9th production design). (A) is a performance symbol lottery table used when the set value is "1", (B) is a performance symbol lottery table used when the set value is "2", and (C) is a set value "3". (D) is a performance symbol lottery table used when the set value is "4", (E) is a performance symbol lottery table used when the set value is "5", (F) is an effect symbol lottery table used when the set value is "6". FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a symbol setting suggesting effect that is executed when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing symbol mode; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a high setting suggestion effect that is executed when the SP reach is lost. 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 4 is a flowchart of power-on processing; 9 is a flowchart of setting change mode processing; 7 is a flowchart of setting value change lamp lighting processing. 9 is a flowchart of setting value confirmation mode processing; It is a flowchart of a process at the time of power failure recovery. 4 is a flowchart of error mode processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. 10 is a flowchart of setting value change lamp extinguishing processing. 4 is a flowchart of base arithmetic processing; 9 is a flowchart of base display processing; 9 is a flowchart of base display processing; 7 is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-control main processing; 4 is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing of the first embodiment; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is a flow chart of production pattern selection processing. It is a flow chart of a variation effect pattern selection process. (A) is a set value change lamp turn-on lottery table of a modification of the first embodiment, and (B) is a set value change lamp turn-off lottery table of a modification of the first embodiment. (A) is a set value change suggestion effect start lottery table of the second form, and (B) is a set value change suggestion effect end lottery table of the second form. FIG. 11 is a diagram for setting a setting value change suggestion effect of the second form; FIG. 11 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing of the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart of the end processing of the variation effect of the second form. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of setting value change suggestion effect start processing of the second form; FIG. (A) is a set value change suggestion effect start lottery table of a modification of the second form, and (B) is a set value change suggestion effect end lottery table of a modification of the second form. In the modified example, it is a diagram for explaining a change in the effect mode when the setting confirmation operation is performed after the setting change mode transition operation, the RAM clear switch operation, and the setting confirmation operation. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining that the display mode of the set value changes due to the setting confirming operation in the modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining that a set value and a base are simultaneously displayed on a 7-segment display in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining that the modified example has a first display means for displaying a set value and a second display means for displaying a base; In a modification, it is an electric circuit diagram for explaining the power supplied between the power supply unit, the payout control board and the game control board. FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the in-circuit inspection of the electric circuit shown in FIG. 74; In a modification, it is an electric circuit diagram for explaining the power supplied between the power supply unit, the payout control board and the game control board. FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the in-circuit inspection of the electric circuit shown in FIG. 76; In the modification, (A) is a diagram showing the electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is at the standby position, and (B) is a diagram showing the electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in the middle of being operated from the standby position to the rotating position. and (C) is a diagram showing an electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in the rotating position.

1. Structure of Gaming Machine A pachinko gaming machine PY1, which is an embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following description, the left-right direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described as being the same as the left-right direction for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Also, the front direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is defined as the direction toward the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and the rear direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is defined as the direction away from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. do.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY1 of the embodiment has a game machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine frame 2 constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko game machine PY1, and includes an outer frame 22, an inner frame 21 and a front door 23 (front frame). The outer frame 22 is a vertically rectangular frame that forms the outer shell of the pachinko game machine PY1. The inner frame 21 is arranged inside the outer frame 22, and is a vertically rectangular frame on which the later-described game board 1 is attached. The front door 23 is arranged on the front side of the outer frame 22 and the inner frame 21 and has a vertical rectangular shape to protect the game board 1 . The front door 23 is a portion facing the player, and is decorated with various decorations.

The game machine frame 2 is configured with a hinge portion 24 on the left end side. The front door 23 is rotatable with respect to the outer frame 22 and the inner frame 21 by the hinge portion 24, and the inner frame 21 is rotatable with respect to the outer frame 22 and the front door 23. It's becoming An opening 23a is formed in the center of the front door 23, and a transparent plate 23t is attached to the opening 23a so that the player can visually recognize a game area 6, which will be described later. Although the transparent plate 23t is a glass plate in this embodiment, it may be a transparent synthetic resin plate. That is, the transparent plate 23t may be one that allows the game area 6 to be visually recognized from the front.

In the game machine frame 2, if the outer frame 22 is regarded as corresponding to the "base frame", the inner frame 21 and the front door 23 can be regarded as corresponding to the "front frame". Further, in the game machine frame 2, if the outer frame 22 and the inner frame 21 are regarded as equivalent to the "base frame", the front door 23 can be regarded as equivalent to the "front frame".

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the front door 23 has a handle 72k (game ball hitting means) for shooting game balls with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle, and a hitting ball supply tray (for storing game balls). An upper tray) 34 and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 35 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 34 are provided. Further, the front door 23 is provided with an effect button (input unit) 40k and a select button 42k that can be operated by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The select button (cross key) 42k is composed of an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button. Further, the front door 23 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 212 and a speaker (not shown in FIG. 1) for outputting sound.

A game board 1 shown in FIG. 4 is attached to the game machine frame 2 . As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 1 is formed with a game area 6 surrounded by a rail member 62 in which a game ball shot by operating the handle 72k flows down. Also, the game board 1 is provided with a large number of board lamps 54 for decoration. In the game area 6, a plurality of game pegs for guiding game balls are projected. The game board 1 is formed by integrating a plate-shaped member arranged on the front side and a back unit arranged on the rear side (a unit for attaching various control boards, an image display device 50, a harness, etc., which will be described later). It is.

An image display device 50 (effect display means, image display means), which is a liquid crystal display device, is provided near the center of the game area 6 . Note that the image display device may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device. The display screen 50a (display unit) of the image display device 50 has a production design display area for performing variable display of production design EZ (decorative design) synchronized with variable display of the first special design and the second special design described later. . The effect of displaying the effect symbol EZ (effect symbol) is called the effect symbol variation effect. The production design fluctuation production is sometimes called "decorative design fluctuation production" or simply "variation production". The effect symbol display area is composed of three effect symbol display areas, for example, "left", "middle" and "right". A left performance symbol EZ1 is displayed in the left performance symbol display area, a middle performance symbol EZ2 is displayed in the medium performance symbol display area, and a right performance symbol EZ3 is displayed in the right performance symbol display area.

Each of the effect symbols EZ consists of a plurality of symbols representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The image display device 50 is a first special symbol displayed on a first special symbol indicator 81a and a second special symbol indicator 81b, which will be described later, by a combination of the left performance symbol EZ1, the middle performance symbol EZ2, and the right performance symbol EZ3. And the result of the variable display of the second special symbol (that is, the result of the jackpot lottery) is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the performance symbol EZ is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In addition, when it is a miss, the performance symbol EZ is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. That is, the player generally grasps the result of the jackpot lottery by the image display device 50 rather than by the first special figure display device 81a or the second special figure display device 81b. In addition, the position of the performance symbol display area may not be fixed. Further, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbols EZ, for example, there is a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction.

The image display device 50 displays, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect using the effect symbol EZ as described above, a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game, a demonstration effect for waiting for customers (customer waiting effect), and the like. 50a. In addition, in the effect symbol variation effect, effect images other than the effect symbol EZ such as a background image and a character image are displayed in addition to the effect symbol EZ such as numbers.

Further, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 has a pending icon display area for displaying a pending icon HA (effect pending image) according to the number of stored first special figure pending and second special figure pending, which will be described later. By the display of the pending icon HA, the storage number of the first special figure pending displayed in the first special figure pending display 83a described later, the second special shown in the second special pending display 83b described later It is possible to clearly indicate to the player the number of stored figures that are reserved.

A center frame 61 (inner wall portion) is arranged near the center of the game area 6 and in front of the image display device 50 . At the bottom of the center frame 61, a stage 61s capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface to the first starting port 11 described later is formed. A warp 61w is provided on the left side of the center frame 61 to allow game balls to flow in from the entrance and flow out to the stage 61s from the exit. A plate movable body 55k that can move up and down is provided on the upper portion of the center frame 61. As shown in FIG. The board movable body 55k is movable from an origin position above the display screen 50a to an effect position overlapping the center of the display screen 50a in the front-rear direction.

Below the image display device 50 in the game area 6, there is provided a first starting winning device 11D having a first starting opening 11 (ball entry opening) in which the ease with which a game ball enters is always the same. The first starting port 11 is also referred to as a first ball-in port, a fixed ball-in port, a first starting prize-winning port, or a first starting region. Further, the first start winning device 11D is also called first ball entry means, fixed ball entry means, or first start prize winning device. The winning of the game ball into the first starting port 11 (predetermined lottery condition) triggers the lottery of the first special symbol (big hit lottery, ie, acquisition and determination of a big hit random number, etc.).

Also, below the first starting port 11 in the game area 6, a normal variable winning device (normal electric accessory, so-called electric chew) 12D having a second starting port 12 (ball entrance) is provided. The second starting hole 12 is also referred to as a second ball entry hole, a variable ball entry hole, a second starting winning hole, or a second starting region. The electric chew 12D is also referred to as a second ball entry means, a variable ball entry means, or a second starting winning device. The winning of the game ball into the second starting port 12 (predetermined lottery condition) triggers the lottery of the second special symbol (jackpot lottery).

The electric chew 12D has an electric chew opening/closing member 12k (ball opening opening/closing member) that takes an open state and a closed state, and opens and closes the second starting port 12 by operating the electric chew opening/closing member 12k. The electric tuning opening/closing member 12k is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 12s, which will be described later. When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in an open state, it is possible to enter a game ball into the second starting port 12, and when it is in a closed state, it is impossible to enter a game ball into the second starting port 12.例文帳に追加Become. That is, the second starting hole 12 is a starting hole in which the ease with which a game ball enters can be changed. In addition, if the electric chew makes it easier for the ball to enter the second starting port when the electric chew opening and closing member is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, 2 It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the starting hole.

Also, on the right side of the first starting port 11 in the game area 6, a big winning device (special electric accessory) 14D having a big winning port 14 is provided. The big winning opening 14 is also called a special winning opening (special winning section). The big winning device 14D is also called an attacker (AT), a special winning means, or a special variable winning device. The big prize winning device 14D has an AT opening/closing member 14k (special prize opening/closing member) that takes an open state (first state) and a closed state (second state). It opens and closes. The AT opening/closing member 14k is driven by an AT solenoid 14s, which will be described later. A game ball can enter the big winning opening 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in an open state.

A gate 13 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the center frame 61 . The gate 13 is also called a passage opening or a passage area. Passage of the game ball to the gate 13 is a trigger for execution of a normal symbol lottery (that is, normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquisition and determination) that determines whether or not to open the electric chew 12D. Furthermore, a plurality of general prize winning openings 10 are provided in the lower portion of the game area 6 . Also, at the bottom of the game area 6, an out port 19 is provided for discharging out of the game area 6 game balls that have been hit into the game area 6 but have not won in any of the winning openings.

In the game area 6 in which various winning openings are arranged, there are a left game area 6L (first game area) on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction (first game area) and a right game area 6R (second game area) on the right side. There is. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6L is called left hitting. On the other hand, a hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6R is called right hitting. In the pachinko machine PY1 of this embodiment, the flow path through which the game balls flow down when the game is played with the left hand is called the first flow path R1, and the flow path through which the game balls flow down when the game is played with the right hand. , the second flow path R2.

A first starting port 11, a general prize winning port 10, an electric tube 12D, and an out port 19 are provided on the first flow path R1. A player can aim to win a prize to the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by hitting a game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1. In addition, since no gate is arranged on the first flow path R1, the electric tube 12D will not be opened when the player is hitting to the left.

On the other hand, a gate 13, a general prize winning port 10, a big prize winning device 14D, an electric tube 12D, and an out port 19 are provided on the second flow path R2. By hitting the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2, the player can aim to pass through the gate 13, or win a prize in the general winning opening 10, the second starting opening 12, and the big winning opening 14. can.

Also, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the display devices 8 include a first special symbol display device 81a that variably displays the first special symbol, a second special symbol display device 81b that variably displays the second special symbol, and a normal symbol. A normal map display 82 for variably displaying (normal map) is included. The first special symbol is also referred to as the first special symbol or special symbol 1, and the second special symbol is also referred to as the second special symbol or special symbol 2. In addition, the normal pattern is also called a general pattern.

In addition, in the display device 8, the first special figure suspension display 83a that displays the number of storage of the operation suspension (first special figure suspension) of the first special figure display 81a, the operation suspension of the second special figure display 81b 2nd special figure reservation indicator 83b for displaying the number of memories of (second special figure reservation), normal figure reservation indicator 84 for displaying the number of operation reservations (normal figure reservation) of normal figure display 82, and setting A set value change lamp 200 (suggestion notification means) is included to indicate that a value has been changed and that the changed set value has been established.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11 as a trigger. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12 as a trigger. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol (special symbol). Moreover, the 1st special figure indicator 81a and the 2nd special figure indicator 81b may be generically called the special figure indicator 81. As shown in FIG. Also, the first special figure reservation display 83a and the second special figure reservation display 83b may be collectively referred to as the special figure reservation display 83. In addition, the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation may be collectively referred to as special figure reservation.

In the special figure display device 81, the special symbol (identification symbol) is variably displayed (variable display) and then stopped, so that a lottery (special symbol lottery, The result of the jackpot lottery) is notified. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a predetermined specific special pattern (a special pattern of a specific stop mode, i.e., a jackpot pattern), an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed specific special pattern (that is, the type of the jackpot won) is selected. A jackpot game (an example of a special game) is performed to open the big winning hole 14.例文帳に追加In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, the special symbol indicator 81 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery according to its lighting mode. be. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), ``○○●●○○●●'' (○: lights up, ●: lights out) 1, 2, from the left A jackpot pattern in which the fifth and sixth LEDs are lit is displayed. In addition, if the game is lost, a lost pattern is displayed in which only the rightmost LED lights up, such as "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. In addition, the lost design is not a specific special design. In addition, before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined variable time. It is a mode. It should be noted that the variable display mode may be anything, such as blinking all the LEDs all at once, unless each LED is stopped (lighted up in a specific mode).

In this pachinko game machine PY1, when there is a winning (entering a ball) of a game ball into the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, the value of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers (numerical information , determination information) is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 described later. Specifically, if the winning to the first start port 11 is stored as the first special figure reservation, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 105a described later, and if the winning to the second start opening 12 is the second special It is stored in the later-described second special figure suspension storage unit 105b as figure suspension. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 105, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is "4".

The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 is terminated when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the special figure reservation means to determine the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Even if a prize is won during execution of a special game, the right of a jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

And the number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 83. Specifically, each special figure reservation indicator 83 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of special figure reservations by lighting the LEDs by the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed with the passage of the game ball to the gate 13 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 82 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 13 by displaying the normal symbol variably (variably displaying) and then stop-displaying it. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (a normal symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal winning symbol), the second starting port 12 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Auxiliary game is played to make it possible. The opening pattern of the second starting port 12 will be described later.

Specifically, the normal symbol display device 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs (see FIG. 5), and displays normal symbols corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal win pattern with both LEDs lit up is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: unlit). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern is displayed, such as "●○", in which only the right LED lights up. A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be employed as a normal losing pattern. It should be noted that the normal losing design is not a specific normal design. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined variable time. It should be noted that the variable display mode may be anything, such as blinking all the LEDs all at once, unless each LED is stopped (lighted up in a specific mode).

In the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball passes through the gate 13, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 106 described later as normal pattern reservation. memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit 106, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is "4".

The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 106 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the normal design random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the normal design variable display is performed to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko game machine PY1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, with a predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage.

And the number of such normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 84 . Specifically, the normal map hold indicator 84 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal map reserves by lighting the LEDs by the number of normal map reserves.

The setting value change lamp 200 of the pachinko game machine PY1 is composed of, for example, one LED (see FIG. 5), and the setting value described later is changed in the setting change mode described later depending on the lighting mode thereof. This indicates to the player whether or not the set value has been determined. In this embodiment, there are six types of setting values as described later (see FIG. 16), and the probability of lighting the setting value change lamp 200 (suggestion notification) differs according to each setting value (see FIG. 33 ( A)). For example, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode described later and the changed set value is confirmed, the LED may light up as "○" (○: lights up) (Fig. 33 ( A)). Also, even if the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the changed setting value is confirmed, the LED may remain off as indicated by "●" (●: off). On the other hand, if the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the changed set value is not confirmed, the LED will not light up as indicated by "●" (●: off).

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a game control board 100 (main control board) for controlling game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transitions, and effects executed as the game progresses. Effect control board 120 (sub-control board) for controlling related, payout control board 170 and the like for controlling payout of game balls. The game control board 100 constitutes a main control section together with the payout control board 170, and the effect control board 120 constitutes a sub-control section together with an image control board 140 and a sub-drive board 162 which will be described later.

In addition, the sub-control unit includes at least the effect control board 120, and can control the game effect using the effect means (image display device 50, speaker 620, board lamp 54, board movable body 55k, frame lamp 212, etc.) Just do it.

The pachinko game machine PY1 also has a power supply unit 190. As shown in FIG. The power supply unit 190 (power supply unit) inputs AC24V power from the outside of the pachinko game machine PY1, and supplies various voltages (DC5V, DC12V, DC18V, DC24V) required for the operation of the pachinko game machine PY1 based on the AC24V power supply. , DC 37V). Note that DC 5V power is mainly used as a power supply for various integrated circuits (ICs). DC 12V power is mainly used as a power source for various sensors and solenoids. In addition, DC18V power is mainly used as a power supply for various LEDs. The 24V DC power and the 37V DC power are mainly used as power sources for motors (driving means) for presentation.

The power supply unit 190 (power supply unit) first supplies the generated power to the payout control board 170 . The generated power is supplied to the game control board 100 and the performance control board 120 through the payout control board 170 . Furthermore, the generated electric power is supplied to other devices via the payout control board 170, the game control board 100 and the performance control board 120. In this embodiment, the power supply unit 190 is not provided with a backup power supply circuit. This point will be described in detail later.

A power switch 195 (power switching unit) is connected to the power supply unit 190 . The power switch 195 can be switched between an on state (ON state) in which power can be supplied based on an AC 24V power source supplied from the outside, or a cut-off state (OFF state) in which power cannot be supplied. In other words, the power switch 195 switches between power-on and power-off by turning it on or off. become blocked. When the power switch 195 is ON, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is powered on, and when the power switch 195 is OFF, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is powered off.

The power supply unit 190 is also provided with a depressible RAM clear switch 191 (RAM clear operation means). The RAM clear switch 191 is a game control microcomputer 101 (game control means), which will be described later. Information related to the game stored in the game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 (for example, game state information such as a high probability state, special This is for erasing information such as drawing suspension and the result of judgment of whether or not a jackpot is won. As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM clear switch 191 is located on the power supply unit 190 arranged on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (more specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is viewed from the back side, the power switch 195 on the power supply unit 190 is on the right). Therefore, the RAM clear switch 191 cannot be operated unless it is an employee of the game arcade who can open the game machine frame 2 . That is, the RAM clear switch 191 can be said to be an operating means that is substantially impossible for the player to operate. The RAM clear switch 191 is a tact switch, and when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 191 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101 . The state in which the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed is called the ON state of the RAM clear switch 191, and the state in which the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed is called the OFF state of the RAM clear switch 191. FIG. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on the power supply unit 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 191 can be changed as appropriate. Also good.

As shown in FIG. 6, the game control board 100 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 101 (main control means, game control means) includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 storing a program for controlling the progress of the game, etc., a game RAM 104 used as a work memory, A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 for executing programs stored in a game ROM 103 and a game I/O (Input/Output) port 118 for inputting and outputting data and signals are included. In the game RAM 104 (storage means), in addition to the above-described special figure reservation storage unit 105 (first special figure reservation storage unit 105a and second special figure reservation storage unit 105b) and normal figure reservation storage unit 106, settings described later A value information storage unit 107 and a base information storage unit 108 are provided. The game control board 100 is also provided with a 7-segment display 300 and a setting key cylinder 180, as shown in FIG. The 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180 will be detailed later.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a relay board 110, as shown in FIG. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the game control board 100, and a signal is output from the game control board 100 to each solenoid. Specifically, as sensors, a first start sensor 11a, a second start sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, a big winning sensor 14a, a general winning sensor 10a, and a discharge sensor 18a are connected.

The first starting hole sensor 11 a is provided in the first starting hole 11 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 11 . The second starting hole sensor 12a is provided in the second starting hole 12 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 12 . The gate sensor 13 a is provided inside the gate 13 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13 . The big winning hole sensor 14 a is provided in the big winning hole 14 and detects a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 14 . The general winning hole sensor 10 a is provided in the general winning hole 10 and detects a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 10 .

The discharge port sensor 18a is provided in a discharge port (not shown) for discharging game balls to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and detects game balls that have passed through the discharge port. The discharge port is provided at the lower end of the inner frame 21, and the game ball driven into the game area 6 is discharged from the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the big winning port 14, the general winning port 10, the out After entering one of the openings 19, the ball finally passes through the ejection opening. Therefore, it is possible to detect all the game balls hit into the game area 6 by detecting the game balls that have passed through the discharge port with the discharge port sensor 18a. The number of all game balls hit into the game area 6 can be called the total number of shot balls. Also, since the total number of shot balls is the same as the number of all game balls ejected outside the pachinko gaming machine PY1, it can also be called the number of ejected balls, the total number of ejected balls, or the number of out balls.

As solenoids, an electric tuning solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s are connected. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening/closing member 14k of the big winning device 14D.

Furthermore, the game control board 100 includes a special figure indicator 81 (first special figure indicator 81a and second special figure indicator 81b), a general figure indicator 82, a special figure reservation indicator 83 (first special figure reservation display Device 83a and second special figure reservation indicator 83b), general figure reservation indicator 84, and set value change lamp 200 are connected. That is, display control of these display devices 8 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101 .

The game control board 100 also transmits various commands and signals to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 170 includes a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY1 and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card) and a prize ball payout device 73. , and a launcher 72 is connected via a launch control circuit 175 . Launcher 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 (first control board) mounts a payout control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter “payout control microcomputer”) 171 capable of executing control processing related to the payout of game balls according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 171 (payout control means) includes a payout ROM 173 storing a program for controlling payout, a payout RAM 174 used as a work memory, and a payout ROM 173 for executing the program stored in the payout ROM 173. It includes a CPU 172 and a payout I/O port section (input/output circuit) 178 for inputting/outputting data and signals. Note that the payout ROM 173 may be attached externally.

The payout control board 170 drives the prize ball motor 73m of the prize ball payout device 73 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the card unit CU connected to the pachinko game machine PY1 to release the prize balls. or pay out rental balls. For example, when a game ball enters (wins) the first start hole 11, a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 11a is input to the game control microcomputer 101. FIG. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs to the payout control board 170 a prize ball signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first start hole 11 . In this case, the payout control microcomputer 171 that has received the prize ball signal drives the launch solenoid 72s through the launch control circuit 175 based on the number of prize balls information stored in the payout ROM 173, thereby performing the first start. Prize balls (for example, three) are paid out based on the ball entering the mouth 11. - 特許庁At this time, the game balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 73 a for counting, and a detection signal by the prize ball sensor 73 a is output to the payout control board 170 . Here, in this embodiment, the payout control board 170 is provided with a backup power supply circuit 179 . This point will be described in detail later. In this form, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of one game ball into the big winning hole 14 .

When the player operates the handle 72k (see FIG. 1) of the shooting device 72, the touch switch 72a detects contact with the handle 72k, and the shooting volume 72b detects the amount of rotation of the handle 72k. Then, the shooting solenoid 72s is driven so that the game ball is shot with an intensity corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 72b. In this pachinko game machine PY1, one game ball is shot in about 0.6 seconds.

The game control board 100 also transmits various commands to the effect control board 120 . The connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120 . That is, between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed as communication direction control means (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 7, the effect control board 120 is mounted with a one-chip microcomputer for effect control (hereinafter "effect control microcomputer") 121 for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 storing a program for controlling performance as the game progresses, a performance RAM 124 used as a work memory, and a program stored in the performance ROM 123. A performance CPU 122 and a performance I/O port unit 138 for inputting and outputting data and signals are included. The effect RAM 124 is provided with a set value flag 125, which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached. As described above, the effect control board 120 is supplied with power (for example, DC 5V power) from the power supply unit 190 via the payout control board 170 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the effect control board 120 is connected to the image control board 140 and also to the sub-drive board 162 (sub-drive circuit). The effect control microcomputer 121 (effect control means) of the effect control board 120 causes the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to perform display control of the image display device 50 based on the command received from the game control board 100 . The effect control microcomputer 121 transmits control signals via the image input circuit 147 of the image control board 140 . The image CPU 141 then transmits a control signal to the image display device 50 via the image output circuit 148 of the image control board 140 .

The image RAM 143 of the image control board 140 is a memory for developing image data. The image ROM 142 of the image control board 140 stores still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, specifically, characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers, symbols (including decorative patterns), and background data. Image data such as images are stored. The image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 reads out image data from the image ROM 142 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 121 . Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

A speaker 620 (sound output means) is connected to the image control board 140 . The effect control microcomputer 121 outputs sounds, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 620 via the sound CPU 149 of the image control board 140 based on commands received from the game control board 100 . The audio CPU 149 performs audio control of the speaker 620 via the audio control circuit 150 based on a command from the image CPU 141 . Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 620 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120 . However, the sound data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140 .

Although the image control board 140 controls the sound of the speaker 620, an audio control board may be provided separately from the image control board 140, and the sound control of the speaker 620 may be controlled by this sound control board. In this case, the sound control board may be connected to the effect control board 120 or may be connected to the effect control board 120 via the image control board 140 . A CPU may be mounted on the audio control board, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute audio control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM.

Also, as shown in FIG. 7, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 via the sub-drive board 162 based on the command received from the game control board 100. . Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also called lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp, and controls light emission of each lamp according to the light emission pattern data. Control. In addition, the data stored in ROM123 for production|presentation of the production|presentation control board 120 is used for preparation of light emission pattern data.

Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs drive control of the board movable body 55k via the sub-drive board 162 based on the command received from the game control board 100. FIG. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data (also referred to as drive data) that determines the operation mode of the board movable body 55k, and according to the operation pattern data, controls the drive of the motor for driving the board movable body 55k. I do. Data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120 is used to create the operation pattern data.

A CPU may be mounted on the sub-drive board 162, and in that case, the CPU may control the lighting of the lamps and the drive control of the board movable body 55k. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the sub-drive board 162, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

Also, the effect control board 120 is connected with an input section detection sensor (effect button detection sensor) 40a and a select button detection sensor 42a. The input unit detection sensor 40a detects that the input unit 40k (see FIG. 1) is pressed. When the input section 40k is pressed down, a detection signal is output to the effect control board 120 from the input section detection sensor 40a. The select button detection sensor 42a detects that the select button 42k (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the select button 42k is pressed down, a detection signal is output to the effect control board 120 from the select button detection sensor 42a.

6 and 7 are merely functional block diagrams for explaining the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine PY1, and the boards shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 are not the only ones provided. Except for the game control board 100, any one or more boards shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 may be configured as one board, or one board shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 may be configured as a plurality of boards good.

3. Power Supply Unit Next, the power supply unit 190 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. FIG. 8 shows a power supply unit 190 of this embodiment, and FIG. 9 shows a power supply board 190X of a comparative example. Below, the power supply unit 190 and the power supply board 190X are compared and explained.

The power board 190X is generally used as a power supply unit in a pachinko game machine. When the power supply board 190X is used as the power supply unit, the power supply board 190X is the test target board. Therefore, it is not allowed to mount surface mount components on the power supply board 190X, and lead components (Dip components) with lead wires must be mounted. Most of the power supply boards 190X are provided with a backup power supply circuit, and this backup power supply circuit can supply backup power to the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 at the time of power failure. However, the power supply board 190X having a backup power supply circuit unique to pachinko gaming machines is a special order product. As described above, the power supply board 190X cannot replace lead parts with surface-mounted parts, and has a backup power supply circuit. rice field.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the power supply unit 190 is used instead of the power supply board 190X. The power supply unit 190 is modularized and is a general-purpose product. Therefore, when the power supply unit 190 is used as the power supply unit, the power supply unit 190 does not become the test target board. Therefore, the power supply unit 190 can be mounted not only with lead parts but also with surface mount parts. As a result, it is possible to make the power supply unit 190 small (compact) by replacing conventional lead parts with surface mount parts. Further, since the power supply unit 190 is a general-purpose product, it does not have a backup power supply circuit unique to pachinko gaming machines. This allows the power supply unit 190 to be made even smaller.

Thus, as can be seen from the comparison between the power supply unit 190 shown in FIG. 8 and the power supply board 190X shown in FIG. 9, the power supply unit 190 can be configured smaller than the power supply board 190X. In the case of the power supply board 190X, it is necessary to mount lead parts, which have become difficult to obtain in recent years.

Next, the arrangement of the power supply unit 190 will be described. As shown in FIG. 8 , the power supply unit 190 is arranged on the rear lower side of the inner frame 21 . A payout control board 170 is arranged behind the power supply unit 190, and at least a part of the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 overlap in the front-rear direction. The power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are arranged outside the transparent outer cover 25 provided behind the game board 1 . Therefore, the payout control board 170 can be called a "frame side board" provided in the game machine frame 2 (inner frame 21) instead of the game board 1. FIG. The payout control board 170 is accommodated in a payout control board case 170A that does not hinder the visibility of the payout control microcomputer 171 .

On the other hand, the game control board 100 , the effect control board 120 described above, the sub-drive board 162 and the image control board 140 are arranged inside the outer cover 25 of the game board 1 . Therefore, the game control board 100, the effect control board 120, the sub-drive board 162, and the image control board 140 can be called "board side boards" provided on the game board 1 instead of the game machine frame 2. The game control board (main control board) 100 is housed in a game control board case (main board case) 100A that does not hinder the visibility of the game control microcomputer 101 . The game control board 100 and the game control board case 100A constitute a game control board unit (main control board unit) 100B. The game control board unit 100B will be described later.

In this way, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are arranged outside the game board 1 at a short distance behind the inner frame 21 and below. In particular, since the payout control board 170 is arranged so that a portion thereof overlaps the power supply unit 190 in the front-rear direction, the positional relationship facilitates wiring connection. Therefore, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are connected by a harness HN3 (see FIG. 12) which will be described later. Thereby, the power of DC5V generated by the power supply unit 190 is first supplied to the payout control board 170 from the power supply unit 190 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the power supply unit 190 is arranged immediately in front of the payout control board 170 so that most of it is not exposed. That is, when the pachinko game machine PY1 is viewed from the back side, the power supply unit 190 is hidden behind (in front of) the payout control board 170 and is hardly visible. Therefore, it is difficult for the power supply unit 190 to wire-connect the other control boards except for the payout control board 170 arranged immediately behind.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the power supply unit 190 and the game control board 100 are not directly connected by a harness, but the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN4 (see FIG. 12) which will be described later. Thereby, the power of DC5V generated by the power supply unit 190 is supplied from the power supply unit 190 to the payout control board 170 and then supplied from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100 . In this way, it is possible to supply power of DC 5V to the game control board 100 while simplifying wiring routing.

In short, conventionally, a method of branching the power of DC5V generated by the power supply unit 190 (power supply board 190X) to the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 is common. However, in this method, as shown in FIG. 8, when the power supply unit 190 is arranged to be hidden in front of the payout control board 170, it is difficult to connect the power supply unit 190 and the game control board 100. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game control board 100, which is the board side board, is connected to the power supply unit 190 via the payout control board 170, which is the frame side board, in order to simplify the routing of the wiring. As a result, the power of DC5V generated by the power supply unit 190 is once supplied to the game control board 100 via the payout control board 170, and a new power supply relationship is established.

Here, the advantage of being able to configure the power supply unit 190 to be small will be described. As shown in FIG. 8 , the power supply unit 190 is arranged on the rear lower side of the inner frame 21 . In the power supply unit 190 shown in FIG. 8, the length in the vertical direction can be made shorter than that of the power supply board 190X shown in FIG. 9 due to compactness. Thereby, the power supply unit 190 having a short length in the vertical direction can be arranged on the lower side of the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1.

By the way, the front of the power supply unit 190 is the lower part of the front door 23 . The lower portion of the front door 23 is an operation mechanism section 210 (see FIG. 1) having a hitting ball supply tray 34 (upper tray), a lower tray 35, an input section 40k (effect button), a select button 42k, and the like. Therefore, as described above, if the power supply unit 190 having a short vertical length is arranged on the lower side of the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1, the vertical length of the operation mechanism portion 210 is shortened, and the operation mechanism portion The upper end position of 210 can be lowered. As a result, the game board 1 (see FIG. 4) can be expanded downward, and the lower end position of the game area 6 can be lowered. As a result, there is an advantage that the expansion of the game area 6 can improve the amusement of the game.

4. Electric circuit between power supply unit, payout control board and game control board Next, the electric circuit DK1 (see FIG. 12) between the power supply unit 190, payout control board 170 and game control board 100 of this embodiment will be described. . However, before explaining the electric circuit DK1 of this embodiment, the electric circuit DKX between the power supply unit 190, the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 of the comparative example will be explained based on FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the comparative example, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are connected by a harness HN1. A connector CN1 at one end of the harness HN1 is connected to the power supply unit 190, and a connector CN2 at the other end of the harness HN1 is connected to the payout control board 170. The harness HN1 is provided with wiring h1 for supplying power of DC 5V (specific voltage) from the power supply unit 190 (hereinafter also referred to as “normal power supply”) and wiring h2 serving as a ground wire. The harness HN1 is provided with, for example, wiring for supplying power of DC 12V from the power supply unit 190, in addition to the wiring h1 and the wiring h2, but description thereof will be omitted.

In the payout control board 170, there is a power line a1 (specific power line) between the connector CN2 and the branch portion j1. Power line a1 is connected to wiring h1 of harness HN1 via connector CN2. Also, in the payout control board 170, there is a power line a2 connected to the ground G. The power line a2 is connected to the wiring h2 of the harness HN1 via the connector CN2.

A filter (noise removing means) NF1 is connected to the connector CN2 side of the power line a1. The filter NF1 is composed of two coils (inductors) and one capacitor, and is a so-called three-element low-pass filter. In filter NF1, two coils are connected in series with power line a1. Also, one coil is connected in parallel to the power line a1. That is, one side of the capacitor is connected to the power line a1, and the other side of the capacitor is connected to the ground G. This filter NF1 removes high-frequency noise from the power of DC 5V supplied through the power line a1.

A capacitor CA1 is connected in parallel to the branch portion j1 side of the power line a1 with respect to the filter NF1. This capacitor CA1 is an electrolytic capacitor with a relatively large capacitance (for example, a capacitance of 470 μF). An electrolytic capacitor is a capacitor in which a metal oxidized by an electrolyte is used as an anode, a film formed on the surface of the metal is used as a dielectric, and an electrolyte is used as a cathode. This capacitor CA1 prevents the voltage of DC5V from dropping when the current fluctuation (load) in the normal power supply becomes large.

A capacitor CA2 is connected in parallel to the power line a1 closer to the branch j1 than the capacitor CA1. The capacitor CA2 is a ceramic capacitor having a smaller capacitance than the capacitor CA1 (for example, a capacitance of 0.1 μF). A ceramic capacitor is a capacitor that uses ceramic (metal oxide sintered body) as a dielectric. This capacitor CA2 removes high frequency noise from the normal power supply on the power line a1.

There is a power line c1 (first branch power line) directed from the branch portion j1 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line c1 is connected to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the normal power supply (DC5V power from the power supply unit 190) is supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the wiring h1, the power line a1, and the power line c1. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 can normally operate based on the normal power supply.

The payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN2. A connector CN3 at one end of the harness HN2 is connected to the payout control board 170, and a connector CN4 at the other end of the harness HN2 is connected to the game control board 100. The harness HN2 is provided with a wiring h3 for supplying normal power and a wiring h4 for supplying backup power, which will be described later. The harness HN2 is provided with, for example, wiring for supplying power of DC 12V from the power supply unit 190 in addition to the wiring h3 and the wiring h4, but the description thereof will be omitted.

The payout control board 170 has a power line b1 extending from the branch portion j1 to the wire h3 of the harness HN2, and the resistor T1 is connected in series to the branch portion j1 side of the power line b1. The resistor T1 suppresses the current flowing from the branch j1 to the resistor T1. A diode DO1 is connected to the power line b1 closer to the connector CN3 than the resistor T1. The diode DO1 permits the flow of current from the diode DO1 toward the connector CN3, while restricting the flow of current from the diode DO1 toward the branch j1. This diode DO1 can prevent electric charges stored in a capacitor CA3 (an electric double layer capacitor), which will be described later, from flowing from the diode DO1 to the branch portion j1.

A capacitor CA3 is connected in parallel to the power line b1 closer to the connector CN3 than the diode DO1. Capacitor CA3 is an electric double layer capacitor having a rated voltage of 5.5 V and a much larger capacitance than capacitors CA1 and CA2 (for example, capacitance of 0.33 F). The electric double layer capacitor is a capacitor whose operating principle is an electric double layer generated at the interface between the activated carbon and the electrolyte. This capacitor CA3 releases the stored charge when the normal power supply from the power supply unit 190 is no longer supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control board 170 at the time of power failure. Thereby, it is possible to supply the power of DC5V (hereinafter also referred to as "backup power supply") to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 to be described later and the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 to be described later.

A capacitor CA4 is connected in parallel to the power line b1 closer to the connector CN3 than the capacitor CA3. This capacitor CA4 is a ceramic capacitor similar to the capacitor CA2 described above. This capacitor CA4 can remove high-frequency noise from the backup power supplied through the power line b1.

Further, the power line b1 has a branched portion j2 on the connector CN3 side of the capacitor CA4. Then, there is a power line b2 directed from the branch portion j2 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line b2 is connected to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the backup power supply is supplied to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 through the power lines b1 and b2 by releasing the charge stored in the capacitor CA3 at the time of power failure. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 can operate based on the backup power source even when the power is cut off. In other words, it is possible to prevent erasing of the payout information stored in the payout RAM 174 .

The power line b1 is also connected to the wiring h3 via the connector CN3. The wiring h3 is connected to the power line d1 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN4. The power line d1 is connected to the Vb terminal of the microcomputer 101 for game control. As a result, the backup power supply is supplied to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the power line b1, the wiring h3 and the power line d1 by releasing the charge stored in the capacitor CA3 at the time of power failure. . As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can operate based on the backup power supply even when the power is cut off. That is, it is possible to prevent the game information stored in the game RAM 104 from being erased. The power line b1, the wiring h3, and the power line d1 correspond to the "second branch power line".

Also, the payout control board 170 has a power line c2 extending from the branch portion j1, and the power line c2 is connected to the wiring h4 via the connector CN3. The wiring h4 is connected to the power line d2 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN4. The power line d2 is connected to the Vc terminal of the microcomputer 101 for game control. As a result, the power of DC 5V from the power supply unit 190 is supplied to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the wiring h1, the power line a1, the power line c2, the wiring h4 and the power line d2. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can normally operate based on the normal power source (DC5V power from the power supply unit 190).

As described above, according to the electric circuit DKX of the comparative example, in the payout control board 170, as shown in FIG. be. Further, it is possible to supply normal power to the capacitor CA3 through the power line b1 extending from the branched portion j1, and store charges in the capacitor CA3. And at the time of power failure, it is possible to supply a backup power source to the payout control microcomputer 171 by the power line b1 and the power line b2 extending from the branch portion j1. Thus, by using the power line c1 and the branches of the power lines b1 and b2, it is possible to supply the normal power supply and the backup power supply to the payout control microcomputer 171 with a simple circuit configuration.

Further, according to the electric circuit DKX of the comparative example, at the time of power failure, the capacitor CA3 provided in the payout control board 170 supplies backup power to the payout control microcomputer 171 through the power lines b1 and b2. It is possible and can be supplied to the game control microcomputer 101 of the game control board 100 via the power line b1, the wiring h3 and the power line d1. That is, backup power can be supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 and the game control microcomputer 101 without providing a capacitor as backup power supply means on the power board. Therefore, the power supply unit 190 (see FIG. 8) can be used in place of the power supply board 190X (see FIG. 9), and a new backup power supply relationship can be established.

By the way, the electric circuit DKX of the comparative example has the following problems. First, various control boards (electronic circuit boards) including the payout control board 170 are subjected to an in-circuit inspection in the manufacturing process. An in-circuit test uses an in-circuit tester to transmit signals to individual electronic components while the electronic components are mounted on the board, and to detect errors in the number of components (resistance, capacitor, and inductance values). It is used to inspect whether there are any defects, soldering open or short circuit, lead floating, and IC malfunction. The in-circuit test is performed with the CPU and one-chip microcomputer removed from the substrate. After the in-circuit test is completed, a CPU and a one-chip microcomputer are mounted on the substrate, and a function test is performed. Note that the function test is to actually operate the control board and check whether or not the output of the electronic circuit board as a whole satisfies the specifications.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11, during the in-circuit test of the comparative example, the in-circuit tester INC is connected to the dispensing control board 170, and power is supplied from the in-circuit tester INC through the power line a1 and the power line b1. is supplied to the capacitor CA3. As a result, the capacitor CA3 stores electric charge. However, the charge once stored in the capacitor CA3 is not released immediately. Therefore, when the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170 after the in-circuit test is completed, the charge remaining in the capacitor CA3 can act on the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 may malfunction.

In short, as a result of mounting the capacitor CA3 as a backup power supply means on the payout control board 170, there is a risk that the payout control microcomputer 171 may malfunction due to the charge remaining in the in-circuit test. In particular, the capacitor CA3 is an electric double layer capacitor that can store a large amount of electric charge but takes a relatively long time to discharge the electric charge. Therefore, electric charge tends to remain in the capacitor CA3, and there is a risk that the payout control microcomputer 171 may malfunction as described above.

Therefore, the electric circuit DK1 between the power supply unit 190 of this embodiment, the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 is configured as shown in FIG. In the electric circuit DK1 of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 12, the description of the portions common to the configuration of the electric circuit DKX of the comparative example shown in FIG. 10 will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are connected by a harness HN3. A connector CN5 at one end of the harness HN3 is connected to the power supply unit 190, and a connector CN6 at the other end of the harness HN3 is connected to the payout control board 170. The harness HN3 is provided with a wiring H1 for supplying 5V DC power (normal power supply) from the power supply unit 190, a wiring H2 for supplying 5V DC power different from the normal power supply, and a wiring H3 serving as a ground line. It is

In the payout control board 170, a power line A1 and a power line A2 are provided in parallel. Power line A1 is connected to wiring H1 of harness HN3 via connector CN6. As a result, normal power is supplied to the power line A1 through the wiring H1. Power line A2 is connected to wiring H2 of harness HN3 via connector CN6. As a result, power of DC 5V, which is different from the normal power supply, is supplied to the power line A2 via the wiring H2. Also, in the payout control board 170, there is a power line A3 connected to the ground G. Power line A3 is connected to wire H3 of harness HN3 via connector CN6.

A filter NF1 similar to the filter NF1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the connector CN6 side of the power line A1. This filter NF1 can remove high-frequency noise from the normal power supplied through the power line A1. A capacitor CA1 similar to the capacitor CA1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the power line A1 closer to the connector CN7 than the filter NF1. This capacitor CA1 can prevent the DC5V voltage from dropping when the current fluctuation (load) in the normal power supply increases. A capacitor CA2 similar to the capacitor CA2 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the power line A1 closer to the connector CN7 than the capacitor CA1. This capacitor CA2 can remove high-frequency noise from the normal power supplied through the power line A1.

The power line A1 has a power line C1 directed from the branch portion J1 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line C1 is connected to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the normal power supply is supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the wiring H1, the power line A1, and the power line C1. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 can operate on the normal power supply. The power line A1 and the power line C1 correspond to the "first specific power line".

The payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN4. A connector CN7 at one end of the harness HN4 is connected to the payout control board 170, and a connector CN8 at the other end of the harness HN4 is connected to the game control board 100. The harness HN4 is provided with a wiring H4 for supplying normal power and a wiring H5 for supplying backup power.

Power line A1 is connected to wiring H4 via connector CN7. The wiring H4 is connected to the power line D1 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN8. The power line D1 is connected to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. FIG. As a result, the normal power supply is supplied to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the wiring H1, the power line A1, the wiring H4, and the power line D1. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can normally operate based on the power supply.

A filter NF2 is connected to the connector CN6 side of the power line A2. Filter NF2 is similar to filter NF1 described above. This filter NF2 can remove high-frequency noise from the DC5V power (hereinafter also referred to as “charging power”) supplied from the power supply unit 190 . The charging power is 5V DC power, which is the same as the normal power supply, but it is only power for storing charges in the capacitor CA3. A resistor T1 similar to the resistor T1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in series on the connector CN7 side of the power line A2 rather than the filter NF2. This resistor T1 can suppress the current of the charging power supplied through the power line A2. A diode DO1 similar to the diode DO1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the power line A2 closer to the connector CN7 than the resistor T1. This diode DO1 can prevent the charge stored in the capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) from flowing from the diode DO1 to the connector CN6 side.

A capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) similar to the capacitor CA3 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the power line A2 closer to the connector CN7 than the diode DO1. This makes it possible to supply backup power by discharging the charge stored in the capacitor CA3 when power is cut off. A capacitor CA4 similar to the capacitor CA4 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the power line A2 closer to the connector CN6 than the capacitor CA3. This capacitor CA4 can remove high-frequency noise from the backup power supplied through the power line A2.

Further, the power line A2 has a branched portion J2 on the connector CN7 side of the capacitor CA4. From this branch J2, there are a power line B1 directed to the payout control microcomputer 171 and a power line B2 directed to the connector CN7. The power line B1 is connected to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 . Thereby, it is possible to supply the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 through the power line A2 and the power line B1 at the time of power failure. The power line A2 and the power line B1 correspond to the "second specific power line".

The power line B2 is also connected to the wiring H5 via the connector CN7. The wiring H5 is connected to the power line D2 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN8. The power line D2 is connected to the Vb terminal of the microcomputer 101 for game control. Thereby, when power is cut off, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 can be supplied to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the power line A2, the power line B2, the wiring H5 and the power line D2. A portion including the capacitor CA3, the diode DO1, the power line A2, the power line B1, and the power line B2 corresponds to the "backup power supply circuit 179 (see FIG. 6)" of the present embodiment.

As described above, according to the electric circuit DK1 of the present embodiment, in the payout control board 170, as shown in FIG. 2 specific power lines) extend toward the payout control microcomputer 171 in a separated state. Therefore, it is possible to supply normal power to the payout control microcomputer 171 through the power line A1. In addition, it is possible to supply charging power to the capacitor CA3 through the power line A2 and store electric charges in the capacitor CA3. And at the time of power failure, it is possible to supply backup power to the payout control microcomputer 171 by the power line A2 and the power line B1.

At the time of the in-circuit test of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. At this time, the in-circuit tester INC controls so as to supply power to the power line A1 but not to the power lines A2 and B1. As a result, it is possible to perform an in-circuit test without accumulating charges in the capacitor CA3. Therefore, even if the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170 after the in-circuit test is completed, it is possible to prevent the charge remaining in the capacitor CA3 from acting on the payout control microcomputer 171. . As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the payout control microcomputer 171 malfunctions. Other effects of this embodiment are the same as those of the above-described comparative example, so description thereof will be omitted.

5. Explanation of Big Wins, etc. In the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, there are "big wins" and "losses" as a result of the big win lottery (special symbol lottery). At the time of the "big win", the special figure display 81 stops displaying the "big win pattern". At the time of "missing", the special symbol display 81 stops displaying the "losing symbol". When a big win is won, a "jackpot game" for opening the big prize opening 14 is executed in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped special symbol (type of the big win). A jackpot game is also called a special game.

In this form, the jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit games), the opening (also referred to as OP) before the first round game starts, and the ending after the final round game ends ( ED). Each round game starts with the end of the OP or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ED. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning hole between round games is included in the open round game before closing. In this embodiment, for example, the third round game in the jackpot game may be described as 3 rounds.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, there are roughly two types in this embodiment. There is a variable jackpot and a normal jackpot. The variable probability jackpot is a jackpot that controls the game state after the jackpot game to a high probability state, which will be described later. The normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game is controlled to a normal probability state (low probability state) described later.

More specifically, the probability variable jackpot and normal jackpot that can be won in the special drawing 1 lottery (first special pattern lottery) are 29.5 seconds maximum per 1R from 1R to 5R. It is a jackpot that opens over a period). That is, the effective number of rounds for these is 5R. The substantial number of rounds is the number of rounds in which game balls can win up to the upper limit number of winning prizes per round (10 in this embodiment). It should be noted that, when the "probability variable jackpot 1" is won by the lottery of the special figure 1, the "special figure 1_probability variation pattern" is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 81a, and when the "normal jackpot" is won , "Special Figure 1_Normal Design" is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display 81a.

In addition, the probability variable jackpot and normal jackpot that can be won in the lottery of special figure 2 (lottery of the second special pattern) open the big prize opening 14 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds (predetermined period) per 1R from 1R to 10R. It's a big hit. That is, their effective number of rounds is 10R. It should be noted that, when the "probability variation jackpot" is won by the special figure 2 lottery, the "special figure 2_probability variation pattern" is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 81b, and when the "normal jackpot" is won, "Special Figure 2_Normal Design" is stop-displayed on the second special figure display 81b, and the distribution rate of the "normal jackpot" by lottery for the special figure 2 is 35%.

Even if any jackpot is won, after the jackpot game, it is controlled to an electric support control state (high base state), which will be described later. The electric sapo control state continues until the next jackpot election when it is controlled in accordance with the high probability state. On the other hand, when it is controlled along with the normal probability state (low probability state), the number of times of electric support (time saving number of times) is set to 100 times. The number of electric sapo is the upper limit execution number of times of variable display of special symbols in the electric sapo control state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, the allocation rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2 is 65% for the probability variable jackpot and 35% for the normal jackpot. However, if a jackpot is won based on the lottery of special figure 1, a jackpot game with a substantial number of rounds of 3 rounds will be executed, and if a jackpot is won based on the lottery of special figure 2 The lottery of the special figure 2 is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the special figure 1 in that a jackpot game with a typical number of rounds of 10 rounds is executed.

Here, in the pachinko game machine PY1, the lottery as to whether or not the jackpot is a big win is performed based on the "jackpot random number", and the lottery for the type of the winning jackpot is performed based on the "win type random number". As shown in FIG. 15(A), the jackpot random number ranges from 0 to 65,535. The winning type random number takes a value in the range of 0-99. In addition to the jackpot random number and the winning type random number, the random numbers obtained based on the winning of the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 include "reach random numbers" and "fluctuation pattern random numbers".

The ready-to-win random number is a random number that determines whether or not to generate a ready-to-win in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of performance symbols EZ that is variably displayed remains. It is a state (for example, a state of "7↓7") which is a combination of performance symbols EZ indicating a jackpot winning. Incidentally, the effect symbol EZ that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if it is slightly swaying within the display screen 50a, or may be displayed so as to be repeatedly enlarged and reduced. This reach random number takes a value in the range of 0-255.

Also, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0-99. Random numbers acquired based on passing through the gate 13 include normal symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) shown in FIG. 15(B). The normal symbol random number is a random number for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 12D. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range from 0 to 65535.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot has been hit (whether or not a jackpot game is to be executed) using the jackpot determination table. As shown in FIGS. 16(A) to 16(F), the big hit determination table is provided corresponding to each set value. In this embodiment, six types of set values are provided: "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6".

The set value is a parameter that determines the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big-hit determination process (referred to as "big-hit determination probability" or "big-hit winning probability" as appropriate). The set value is set by an employee of the game arcade or the like, as will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 16(A) to 16(F), each of the jackpot determination tables corresponding to each set value includes a jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state and a jackpot determination table used in a high probability state. There is a table. The types of set values and the types of big hit determination tables are not limited to six types, and can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 16(A) to 16(F), each of the big win determination tables corresponding to each setting value is assigned with a big win random number determined as a big win or a loss. This pachinko game machine PY1 determines whether it is a big win or a loss using a big win determination table corresponding to the set value. In this embodiment, it is set so as not to win a small hit, but it may be set so that a small win may be won. Also, the probability of being determined as a big win and the method of distributing the random numbers determined as a big win are not limited to those shown in FIGS.

A setting with a setting value of "1" is called "setting 1", a setting with a setting value of "2" is called "setting 2", and a setting with a setting value of "3" is called "setting 3". A setting with a setting value of "4" is called "setting 4", a setting with a setting value of "5" is called "setting 5", and a setting with a setting value of "6" is called "setting 6". ” also says. In addition, when the setting value is "1", the setting value is "1" (first setting value), when the setting value is "2", the setting value is "2", and when the setting value is "3". If the setting value is "3", the setting value is "4", the setting value is "4", the setting value is "5", the setting value is "5", and the setting value is "6". 6” (second set value) in some cases.

In the first mode, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability state when the setting value "1" is set is approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability state is approximately 1/30. In addition, when the set value is set to "2", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/280, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is approximately 1/28. When the setting value "3" is set, the jackpot winning probability in the low probability state is approximately 1/260, and the jackpot winning probability in the high probability state is approximately 1/26. In addition, when the set value is set to "4", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is about 1/240, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is about 1/24. In addition, when the set value is set to "5", the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/220, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability state is approximately 1/22. Finally, when the set value is set to "6", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is about 1/200, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is about 1/20.

6. Explanation of Game State Next, the game state of the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment will be explained. The special figure indicator 81 and the normal figure indicator 82 of the pachinko game machine PY1 respectively have a probability variation function and a variation time shortening function. The state in which the probability variation function of the special figure indicator 81 is operating is called "high probability state", and the state in which it is not operating is called "normal probability state (non-high probability state)". In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal probability state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16(A) to 16(F), for each set value, the jackpot determination table used in the high probability state is more than the jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state. It is set so that it can be easily determined as a big hit. Furthermore, in the game state of the normal probability state or the high probability state, if the game state is the same, the higher the set value is set, the more likely it is to be determined as a big hit.

Moreover, the state in which the variable time reduction function of the special figure indicator 81 is operating is called "time saving state", and the state in which it is not operating is called "non-working time saving state". In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. That is, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 18). That is, when the variable time shortening function of the special figure display 81 operates, it becomes easy to select a short variable time as the variable display of the special symbol compared to when it is not operating. As a result, in the time saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning of the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function of the special figure indicator 81 may operate simultaneously, or only one of them may operate. And, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal figure indicator 82 are designed to operate in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening function of the special figure indicator 81 . That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal figure indicator 82 operate|move in a time saving state, and do not operate|move in a non-working time saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is higher than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the value of the normal design random number (hit random number) that is determined to be a hit is determined using a normal design hit determination table that is larger than the normal design hit determination table used in a non-time saving state, and the hit determination (normal design determination) is performed ( See FIG. 17(B)). In other words, when the probability variation function of the normal pattern indicator 82 is activated, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol indicator 82 is a normal winning symbol is higher than when it is not activated. .

In addition, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal design is shorter than in the non-working time saving state. In the present embodiment, the variation time of normal symbols is 7 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 17(C)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state (see FIG. 19). That is, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 12D is operating. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (see FIG. 19). That is, the function of increasing the number of openings of the electric chew 12D is activated.

When the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of the normal map display 82 and the opening time extension function and opening frequency increase function of the electric chew 12D are operating, compared to when these functions are not operating As a result, the electric chew 12D is frequently opened, and game balls enter the second starting port 12 frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Accordingly, the state in which these functions are activated is referred to as the "high base state" and the state in which they are not activated is referred to as the "low base state." In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the game balls on hand. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning to the second starting port 12 by the electric chew 12D) is being executed. Therefore, the high base state is also called an electric sapo control state or an easy ball entry state. On the other hand, the low base state is also referred to as a non-electric support control state or a non-entering easy state.

A high base state may not be one in which all of the above functions are active. That is, operation of one or more of the probability variation function of the normal map display 82, the variation time shortening function of the normal map display 82, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 12D, and the opening frequency increasing function of the electric chew 12D. Therefore, it is sufficient that the power tube 12D can be opened more easily than when the function is not activated. Also, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state.

In the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the probability variable jackpot is a high probability state, a time saving state and a high base state. This game state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state". The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (10000 times in this embodiment), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed. That is, in this form, the high-probability-high base state substantially continues until the next jackpot election. It should be noted that the end condition of the high-probability-high base state may be only that the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the normal jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, ie, low probability state), time saving state and high base state. This game state is particularly referred to as "low certainty high base state". The low-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed.

When the pachinko game machine PY1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is the normal probability state, the non-time saving state, and the low base state. This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state is referred to as "normal game state". Also, the state during execution of the special game (jackpot game) is referred to as "special game state (jackpot game state)". Further, a state in which at least one of the high-probability state and the high-base state is controlled is referred to as a "privilege game state".

In high-base states such as high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, the game can be played more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 6R (see FIG. 4) by hitting to the right. This is because it is easier to open the electric chew 12D than in the low base state due to the electric sapo control, and it is easier to win the second start opening 12 than to win the first start opening 11. . Therefore, while passing the game ball to the gate 13 which triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is struck to the right to enter the second starting port 12.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning at the starting opening) than when hitting left. In addition, in this pachinko game machine PY1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the low base state, the game can be played more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 6L (see FIG. 4) by hitting to the left. Since the electric sapo control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 12D compared to the high base state, and winning the first starting port 11 is easier than winning the second starting port 12. It is because Therefore, left-handed hitting is performed in order to make the game ball enter the first starting port 11.例文帳に追加This allows you to get more starting prizes than hitting right.

7. Game Control Board Unit, Setting Value Change Method and Set Value Method Next, the game control board unit 100B, setting change method, and setting fix method will be described in order. First, the game control board unit 100B will be described. 20A is a perspective view of the game control board unit 100B, FIG. 20B is a front view of the game control board unit 100B, and FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the game control board unit 100B. be. As described above, the game control board unit 100B includes the game control board 100 and the game control board case 100A.

The game control board case 100A includes, as shown in FIG. , is equipped with The game control board 100 is screwed to the lid case 410 , and the lid case 410 is assembled to the bottom case 420 . Thus, the game control board 100 is accommodated inside the game control board case 100A (see FIG. 20(A)). After housing the game control board 100, the game control board case 100A is unopenably sealed by crimping pins 430, 430 on the left side and right side (see FIG. 20(B)).

A game control microcomputer 101 is mounted via an IC socket at the center in the horizontal direction and the center in the vertical direction of the game control board 100 . In addition, a 7-segment display 300 is mounted in the center of the game control board 100 in the horizontal direction and in the lower part in the vertical direction (below the game control microcomputer 101). The game control board case 100A is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin (for example, polycarbonate). Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the mounted components such as the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 from the outside of the game control board case 100A.

A setting key cylinder 180 is mounted on the lower left portion of the game control board 100 (the lower right portion when the pachinko game machine PY1 is viewed from the rear). As shown in FIG. 21, the mounting position of the setting key cylinder 180 is a position at a predetermined distance from the periphery of the game control board 100 . Specifically, the setting key cylinder 180 is mounted at a distance of about 2 cm from the lower edge 100a and the left edge 100b of the game control board 100, respectively. Thus, providing a gap between the setting key cylinder 180 and the peripheral edge of the game control board 100 (the setting key cylinder 180 is mounted in a region other than the peripheral part of the game control board 100) is necessary. This is so that the connector parts can be mounted according to the requirements. That is, if a space capable of mounting a connector component is left on the game control board 100 in this way, it is possible to manufacture a different type of game machine (a different model) from the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment in the future. , connector parts can be easily added to the game control board without significantly changing the wiring pattern of the game control board 100 . That is, it is possible to standardize the wiring pattern (wiring pattern other than connector parts) of the game control board between different models.

The setting key cylinder 180 is a switch component capable of switching between an ON state and an OFF state using a dedicated setting key 184 (see FIG. 20A). As shown in FIG. 21, the setting key cylinder 180 includes a rotating portion 183 (inner cylinder, inner cylinder) rotatably provided inside a fixed portion 182 (outer cylinder, outer cylinder). . The rotating portion 183 is provided with a keyhole 185 for inserting the setting key 184 .

The setting key 184 is inserted into the keyhole 185 of the setting key cylinder 180, and the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is moved from the OFF position (also referred to as the standby position or the initial position, indicated by solid lines in FIG. 29) to the ON position (rotating position). 29 (also referred to as position or movement position), the switching circuit (setting key cylinder switch 180a described later, see FIG. 27) in the setting key cylinder 180 is switched ON/OFF. be able to. The state in which the setting key cylinder switch 180a is OFF is referred to as the OFF state of the setting key cylinder 180, and the state in which the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON is referred to as the ON state of the setting key cylinder 180. The ON position of the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is a position rotated by 90 degrees from the OFF position. Further, when the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is at the ON position (rotating position), it is also said that "the setting key cylinder 180 is at the rotating position", and the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is at the OFF position (standby position). position) is also referred to as "the setting key cylinder 180 is at the standby position".

As shown in FIG. 21, the setting key cylinder 180 has a key insertion side portion 187 having a keyhole surface 186 provided with a keyhole 185, and a lead portion 199 (see FIG. 22) connected to the game control board 100. and a board connection side portion 188 . The key insertion side portion 187 is a portion of the setting key cylinder 180 on the lid case 410 side, and is a portion that appears to have a substantially cylindrical shape in FIG. Further, the board connection side part 188 is a part of the setting key cylinder 180 on the side of the game control board 100, and is a part that appears to have a substantially quadrangular prism shape in FIG. In other words, the key insertion side portion 187 is the rear side when the setting key cylinder 180 is divided into two portions in the axial direction, and the board connection side portion 188 is the rear side when the setting key cylinder 180 is divided into two portions in the axial direction. This is the front side of the case.

The configuration of the setting key cylinder 180 will now be described in more detail. 22(A) is a cross-sectional view along line AA of FIG. 20(B), and FIG. 22(B) is a cross-sectional view along line BB of FIG. 20(B). As shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, the setting key cylinder 180 has a metal fixing member 198 fitted to the outside of a cylinder portion 197 (a portion including a fixing portion 182 and a rotating portion 183). is. In the cylinder portion 197, a flange portion 197a thicker than the diameter of the keyhole surface 186 (in other words, the area of the surface perpendicular to the axial direction of the cylinder portion 197) is provided at a midway point (approximately at the center) in the axial direction (front-rear direction). A flange portion 197a larger than the keyhole surface 186 (corresponding to a “specific portion”) is provided. A substantially circular opening is provided in the fixing member 198 (see FIG. 21), and the keyhole surface 186 side of the cylinder portion 197 is inserted through the opening. Also, the fixing member 198 is hooked to the flange portion 197a. A connection piece 198 a and a connection pin 198 b formed on the fixing member 198 are soldered to the game control board 100 , and a lead portion 199 extending from the cylinder portion 197 is soldered to the game control board 100 . Thus, the setting key cylinder 180 is attached to the game control board 100 . The above-described key insertion side portion 187 is a portion behind the fixing member 198 (the portion on the lid case 410 side) of the setting key cylinder 180 (see FIG. 21). 180 except for the key insertion side portion 187. FIG.

Next, the relationship between the setting key cylinder 180 and the game control board case 100A will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, the cover case 410 of the game control board case 100A is provided with an opening 411 for exposing the keyhole surface 186 of the setting key cylinder 180 to the outside. The opening 411 has a circular shape slightly larger in diameter than the circular keyhole surface 186 when viewed from the rear (see FIG. 20(B)). When the game control board case 100A accommodates the game control board 100, the keyhole surface 186 of the setting key cylinder 180 and the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 are substantially flush (Fig. 22A). (B)). A gap L1 between the key insertion side portion 187 of the setting key cylinder 180 and the opening portion 411 of the lid case 410 is approximately a little less than 1 mm.

21 and 22(A) and (B), from the inner surface 410b (see FIG. 22) side of the lid case 410 and from the periphery of the opening 411 forward (toward the bottom case 420) A peripheral wall portion 413 is provided extending toward. The peripheral wall portion 413 includes an upper wall portion 413 a surrounding the upper portion of the opening 411 , a lower wall portion 413 b surrounding the lower portion of the opening portion 411 , a left wall portion 413 c surrounding the left side of the opening portion 411 , and a right wall portion 413 c surrounding the opening portion 411 . It is a rectangular peripheral wall made up of a right wall portion 413d that encloses one side. The longitudinal length L2 (see FIG. 22A) of the peripheral wall portion 413 is about 8 mm, and the thickness L3 of the peripheral wall portion 413 (see FIG. 22A) is about 2 mm. When the game control board case 100A accommodates the game control board 100, the peripheral wall part 413 surrounds the board connection side part 188 of the setting key cylinder 180 to the extent of the flange part 197a of the setting key cylinder 180 ( See FIG. 22(A)). A gap L4 between the peripheral wall portion 413 and the substrate connection side portion 188 is approximately a little less than 1 mm. Also, the gap L5 between the peripheral wall portion 413 and the component mounting surface of the game control board 100 is about 5 mm.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game control board case 100A is provided with a peripheral wall portion 413 that surrounds the periphery of the setting key cylinder 180 in accordance with the shape thereof. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting key cylinder 180 from being displaced by an external force such as its own weight. As a result, it is possible to maintain good connection of the setting key cylinder 180 . It should be noted that only the lower wall portion 413b of the peripheral wall portion 413 may be provided if only the prevention of displacement due to the weight of the setting key cylinder 180 is taken into consideration.

Further, in this embodiment, the keyhole surface 186 of the setting key cylinder 180 and the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 are substantially flush with each other (see FIG. 22). That is, the keyhole surface 186 does not protrude or recede with respect to the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A (see FIG. 20(A)). Therefore, compared with the case where the setting key cylinder 180 protrudes from the game control board case 100A, it is possible to secure a space behind the game control board case 100A and prevent the setting key cylinder 180 from being damaged. In addition, since it is possible to almost eliminate the gap between the setting key cylinder 180 and the opening 411 compared to the one that is recessed with respect to the game control board case 100A (the opening 411 is blocked by the setting key cylinder 180). ), it is possible to prevent foreign matter from entering the game control board case 100A from the opening 411. As a result, it is possible to prevent tampering with the setting key cylinder 180 and malfunction of the game control board 100 .

Especially in this embodiment, the opening 411 of the game control board 100 is closed by the setting key cylinder 180, and the peripheral wall part 413 provided on the game control board 100 surrounds the board connection side part 188 of the setting key cylinder 180. are surrounded with almost no gap (see FIGS. 20(A) and 22(A) and (B)). Therefore, it is more difficult to commit a fraudulent act such as accessing the game control microcomputer 101 or the like by inserting a foreign object (for example, wire or piano wire) from the opening 411 . In addition, since the setting key cylinder 180 is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 413, even if foreign matter (for example, wire, piano wire, etc.) enters the inside of the game control board case 100A from a place other than the opening portion 411, contact with the setting key cylinder 180 can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the state of the setting key cylinder switch 180a, which will be described later, from being switched due to the influence of illegal magnetism.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 23, various stickers are attached to the game control board case 100A. In this embodiment, there are four stickers attached to the game control board case 100A: a model name sticker 510, an external terminal information sticker 520, a board management sticker 530, and a sealing sticker 540. Each of these stickers is a model information sticker showing information about the pachinko game machine PY1.

The model name sticker 510 is a model information sticker on which the model name, manufacturer name, etc. of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are described.

Also, the external terminal information seal 520 is a model information seal describing the external terminals of the pachinko game machine PY1. The external terminal (not shown) of the pachinko game machine PY1 is a terminal for outputting information from the pachinko game machine PY1 to an external device such as a hall computer. There are multiple types of external terminals. Specifically, for example, a prize ball signal indicating information on the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine PY1, a frame opening signal indicating that the gaming machine frame 2 is open, and a special figure 1 or special figure 2 are stopped and displayed. There are a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the game has been completed, a jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot game is in progress, and a jackpot signal 2 indicating that the jackpot game is in progress or in a time-saving state. The connector portions of each external terminal are colored in different colors. The correspondence between the colors and the signals is described on the external terminal information label 520. FIG.

The board management seal 530 describes the management number of the game control board 100 (game control board unit 100B), and when the game control board case 100A is opened for inspection etc. (with the crimping pins 430, 430 removed) It is a model information seal provided with an entry column for the opening person and opening date when the game control board case 100A is unsealed.

The sealing sticker 540 is a model information sticker on which characters "opening prohibited" indicating that the game control board case 100A must not be opened. The sealing seal 540 is affixed across both the lid case 410 and the bottom case 420 while the lid case 410 is locked to the bottom case 420 (that is, the game control board case 100A is closed). there is Therefore, when the game control board case 100A is opened, the sealing seal 540 is broken. Therefore, by looking at the seal 540, it is possible to know whether or not the game control board case 100A has been opened. In other words, the sealing sticker 540 is a model information sticker that clearly shows whether or not the game control board case 100A has been opened. Note that model information stickers (model name sticker 510, external terminal information sticker 520, board management sticker 530) other than the sealing sticker 540 are attached to the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 as shown in FIG. It is not affixed across the The sealing sticker may have an IC chip with an antenna so that the ID information stored in the IC chip can be read by a dedicated reader.

In addition, the information written on each model information sticker (model name sticker 510, external terminal information sticker 520, substrate management sticker 530, sealing sticker 540) can be increased or decreased as appropriate within the range that does not impair the function of each model information sticker. . For example, information such as rated voltage and rated power may be written on the model name label 510 . In addition, it is not necessary to include all of the model name sticker 510, the external terminal information sticker 520, the board management sticker 530, and the sealing sticker 540 as the model information stickers. Note that the model name sticker 510, the external terminal information sticker 520, and the board management sticker 530 in this embodiment have various model information and entry fields printed in a predetermined color such as white on a colorless and transparent base. . Therefore, in this embodiment, the inside of the game control board case 100A can be visually recognized to some extent through the seal.

Here, as shown in FIG. 23, the model name sticker 510 and the external terminal information sticker 520 are placed on the left part of the game control board case 100A (the right part when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front). affixed. On the other hand, the board management seal 530 and the sealing seal 540 are attached to the right part of the game control board case 100A (the left part when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front). More specifically, the model name sticker 510 is the lower left portion of the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 (the lower right portion when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front), and exposes the setting key cylinder 180. It is pasted on the right side of the opening 411 (the left side when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front). In addition, the external terminal information seal 520 is the upper left part of the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 (the upper right part when the rear surface 410a in the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front), and the model name seal 510 and the opening 411 affixed to the top. The board management seal 530 is attached to the upper right portion of the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 (the upper left portion when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front). In addition, the sealing seal 540 is affixed to the lower right portion of the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 (the lower left portion when the rear surface 410a of the game control substrate case 100A is viewed as the front) and below the board management seal 530.

As described above, in this embodiment, the model name sticker 510 and the external terminal information sticker 520 are located on the left side of the lid case 410 (the right side when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front, the first sticker attachment area 415), and the board management seal 530 and the sealing seal 540 are attached to the right area of the lid case 410 (the left area when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front, the second seal attachment area 416). affixed. A non-sticking area 417 to which no model information sticker is stuck is formed between the first sticker sticking area 415 and the second sticker sticking area 416 in the lid case 410 . This non-sticking area 417 is located at a position corresponding to the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 mounted on the game control board case 100A. In other words, the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 are mounted on the game control board 100 at positions visible from the non-sticking area 417 . Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 are clearly visible from the non-sticking area 417 without impairing the visibility of various model information stickers. Thus, in this embodiment, the non-sticking area 417 functions as a "window" that allows both the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 to be visually recognized. Below, the non-sticking area 417 is also referred to as a common window portion 417 .

Here, on the surface of the game control microcomputer 101, the model (chip name) of the game control microcomputer 101 and the manufacturing number (that is, information that can specify the game control microcomputer 101), these information, etc. are coded. A two-dimensional code is printed. Also, on the surface of the game control microcomputer 101, a microcomputer model information sticker 550 printed with a two-dimensional code coded with the model name and manufacturer name of the pachinko game machine PY1 and such information is attached. . From the common window portion 417, it is possible to read various information shown on the surface of these game control microcomputers 101 visually or using a code reader.

Further, from the common window portion 417, not only the game control microcomputer 101 but also the 7-segment display 300 can be visually recognized. As will be described later, the 7-segment display 300 may display set values and bases. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to clearly see the set value and the base through the common window portion 417 . When viewed facing the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A, there is at least a distance of 510 model name stickers between the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180. Therefore, when the setting key cylinder 180 is operated with the right hand, the 7-segment display 300 is hardly hidden by the hand (or arm) that operated the setting key cylinder 180, and the display contents of the 7-segment display 300 are visible. It is becoming difficult for the situation to become difficult to occur. Also, in this embodiment, the setting key cylinder 180 is placed outside the information display area 418 (more specifically, on the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A) consisting of the first seal pasting area 415, the second seal pasting area 416, and the common window portion 417. It is arranged on the right side of the information display area 418 when viewed from the front. Therefore, when the setting key cylinder 180 is operated with the right hand, the information display area 418 is less likely to be hidden by the hand (or arm) operating the setting key cylinder 180, and the visibility of the information display area 418 (that is, the game control microcomputer 101 , 7-segment display 300, model name sticker 510, external terminal information sticker 520, board management sticker 530, and sealing sticker 540) are good.

Next, the 7-segment display 300 (display means) will be described. Display control of the 7-segment display 300 is executed by the game control microcomputer 101 . The reason why the 7-segment display 300 is provided on the game control board 100 instead of, for example, the performance control board 120 is as follows. That is, the game control board 100 (game control microcomputer 101) is subject to inspection in a test for confirming proper operation, and if the display of the set values is controlled by the game control board 100, the display of the set values is changed. This is because reliability can be guaranteed.

As shown in FIG. 24, the 7-segment display 300 is a so-called 4-segment 7-segment display (7-segment display), and has a total of 32 lighting (emitting) portions (segments). Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 has a first display area 310, a second display area 320, a third display area 330, and a fourth display area 340 in order from left to right. The four display areas 310, 320, 330, and 340 each have eight lighting portions (LED elements, segments) LB1 so as to represent numbers, characters, symbols, etc. from "0" to "9." to LB8, LB9 to LB16, LB17 to LB24, and LB25 to LB32. Since the 4-segment 7-segment display is widely distributed in the market, the use of the 4-segment 7-segment display (the 7-segment display device 300) makes it possible to construct the display means at low cost.

In this embodiment, any set value from "1" to "6" is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. FIG. Also, when the set value is displayed, the lighting portions LB25 to LB32 of the fourth display area 340 emit light in a lighting mode (light emission mode that continues to emit light) so as to represent the number of the set value. When the setting value is displayed in the fourth display area 340, nothing is displayed in the first display area 310, the second display area 320, and the third display area 330. FIG.

Next, a method for changing the setting value will be described. In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode. The transition to the setting change mode can be performed only when the power is turned on. Here, not only the operation for shifting to the setting change mode but also various operations that can be performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on will be collectively described. As shown in FIG. 25, there are four types of operations that can be performed when pachinko gaming machine PY1 is powered on: setting change mode transition operation, setting confirmation operation, RAM clear operation, and normal power-on operation.

The setting change mode transition operation (setting change enabling operation) is an operation for transitioning to a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed. Specifically, it is an operation of turning on the power switch 195 (turning on the power switch 195) while turning on both the setting key cylinder 180 (setting key switch) and the RAM clear switch 191 . By this operation, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (the pachinko gaming machine PY1 enters a power-on state), and the mode after power-on becomes the setting change mode. The setting change operation and confirmation operation in the setting change mode will be described later. The setting change mode is terminated by the confirmation operation of the setting. As a result, a playable game mode (one of non-setting change modes) is entered.

The setting confirmation operation is an operation for shifting to a setting confirmation mode (one of non-setting change modes). The setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the setting value cannot be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed by displaying the setting value on the 7-segment display 300 . Specifically, the setting confirmation operation is an operation of turning on the power switch 195 (turning on the power switch 195) while turning the setting key cylinder 180 on. In the setting confirmation operation, the RAM clear switch 191 remains in the OFF state. By such a setting confirmation operation, power is supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1, and the mode after the power is turned on becomes the setting confirmation mode. The setting confirmation mode ends when a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 . After the setting confirmation mode is finished, the game mode becomes a playable game mode. The setting confirmation mode may be terminated when the setting key cylinder 180 is turned off (the setting key is rotated to the OFF position).

The RAM clear operation is an operation for shifting to a RAM clear mode (one of non-setting change modes). The RAM clear mode is a mode in which "RAM clear" for initializing a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 101 is performed. When the RAM is cleared, the contents of the game played so far are cleared. Even if the RAM is cleared, the information of the setting values stored in the game RAM 104 is retained without being erased. Moreover, even if the RAM clear mode is entered, the setting value cannot be changed, and the setting value is not displayed on the 7-segment display 300 . Specifically, the RAM clear operation is an operation of turning on the power switch 195 while turning on the RAM clear switch 191 (turning on the power switch 195). The RAM clear operation leaves the setting key cylinder 180 in the OFF state. Such a RAM clearing operation supplies power to the pachinko game machine PY1 and clears the RAM. It should be noted that the RAM clear mode is automatically terminated when a predetermined process relating to RAM clear is executed. When the RAM clear mode ends, it becomes a game mode in which a game can be played. In this embodiment, the RAM is also cleared when the setting change mode is terminated. However, by providing an operation for only clearing the RAM without changing the settings, it is possible to clear the RAM with less work than for changing the settings. .

A normal power-on operation is an operation for turning on the power to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 without transitioning to the setting change mode, transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, and clearing the RAM. Specifically, the normal power-on operation is an operation in which both the setting key cylinder 180 and the RAM clear switch 191 are kept in the OFF state, and the power switch 195 is turned ON (the power switch 195 is turned ON). . By this operation, power is supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1, and the game mode is set in which the game can be played.

The above-described four operations (setting change mode transition operation, setting confirmation operation, RAM clear operation, and normal power-on operation) are generally performed by employees of the pachinko machine PY1. This is impossible for a player who cannot see the back side (see FIG. 8).

In this embodiment, as described above, in order to change the setting value, it is necessary to satisfy three conditions (based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition) and shift to the setting change mode. Specifically, the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated 90 degrees from the standby position (OFF state) by using the setting key 184 (ON state), and the RAM clear switch 191 is depressed (ON state). ), the power switch 195 is switched from the OFF operation (OFF state) to the ON operation (ON state). The reason for providing these three conditions is as follows.

First of all, the reason why the condition is that the power is turned on is that the setting change mode can be entered only when the power is turned on by the employee of the game arcade. In other words, this is to prevent a situation in which a player or the like can shift to the setting change mode during variable display of special symbols or during execution of a jackpot game, and set values are changed during the game. Next, the condition that the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed is to prevent the game from being started based on the information related to the game before the power is turned on even though the setting value has been changed. Because. That is, if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 is always erased (RAM cleared) as will be described later. Therefore, for example, with the setting value before the power is cut off, the remaining special figure hold is determined as a big hit, but with the setting value changed after the power is turned on, the remaining special figure hold is determined as a loss. It is possible to prevent a situation in which game inconsistency occurs. Finally, the condition that the setting key cylinder 180 is in the rotating position is to ascertain the intention of the game arcade employee who changes the setting value. In other words, the setting change mode is a special mode in which setting values can be changed, and this is to prevent random or easy transition to the setting change mode.

Next, the display mode of the 7-segment display 300 and the presentation mode of the rendering means (the image display device 50, the speaker 620, the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54) when changing the set value will be described.

As shown in FIG. 26(A), when the setting change mode transition operation is performed to shift to the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. The set value (for example, "1") that was set before the power was turned on is displayed. In other words, the information of the set value set during the previous game is not erased even if the cut-off state is established. Therefore, when the setting change mode transition operation is performed when the power is turned on, the setting value set during the previous game is changed to 7 segments based on the stored setting value information (hereinafter referred to as "setting value information"). It is displayed on the display 300 . As a result, when the power is turned on, it is possible to first check the current setting (previously determined setting).

When the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 26(B), the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 displays a setting changing image SH (mode suggesting image) indicating characters "setting changing". be done. The setting changing image SH suggests that the setting value can be changed. By starting the display of the setting changing image SH, it is possible for the employee of the game parlor who changes the setting values (hereinafter referred to as "setting changer") to understand that the setting change mode has been correctly entered. is. In addition, the setting changing image SH continues to be displayed on the display screen 50a until the setting change mode ends. Therefore, the setting changer can clearly grasp the period from the start to the end of the setting change mode by the display period of the image SH during setting change.

Also, when the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 26(B), a voice (mode suggesting sound) saying "The setting can be changed" is output from the speaker 620 . This voice saying "The setting can be changed" suggests that the setting value can be changed. It is possible for the person who changes the setting to audibly recognize that the setting change mode has been correctly entered by starting the voice saying "The setting can be changed." Also, the voice saying "The setting can be changed" is repeatedly output until the setting change mode ends, except for the timing when the setting value is changed. Therefore, the setting changer can clearly grasp the period from the start to the end of the setting change mode as long as he or she keeps listening to the voice saying "The setting can be changed."

When the setting change mode is entered, the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special first light emission mode, as shown in FIG. 26(B). Light emission in this special first light emission mode suggests that the set value can be changed. By starting light emission in the first light emission mode, it is possible for the setting changer to understand that the change to the setting change mode has been correctly performed. Further, the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 continue to emit light in the first light emission mode until the setting change mode ends, except for the timing at which the set value is changed. Therefore, the setting changer can clearly grasp the period from the start to the end of the setting change mode as long as he or she keeps watching the light emission in the first light emission mode.

In this manner, in the present embodiment, when the setting change mode is set, not only is the setting changing image SH displayed, but also a voice saying "The setting can be changed" is output and light is emitted in a special first light emission mode. be. As a result, the setting changer can reliably grasp the situation in which the setting value can be changed both visually and aurally. The setting change mode of this embodiment requires three conditions as described above, and is a complicated operation. It is possible to judge whether or not the setting change mode transition operation has been correctly executed depending on whether or not the mode suggestion of light emission in the special first light emission mode is started.

Here, in this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed in the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed. Specifically, each time the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the set value is increased by one in the order of "1" ⇒ "2" ⇒ "3" ⇒ "4" ⇒ "5" ⇒ "6". It is possible to When the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the set value is "6", the set value is returned to "1". Therefore, each time the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the setting value is switched one by one, thereby simplifying the setting value switching method as much as possible.

The existing RAM clear switch 191 is used as an operation means for switching the set values, and a new dedicated operation means is not provided. Conventionally, the RAM clear switch 191 was used only for erasing information stored in the game RAM 104 and the payout RAM 174 when the power was turned on, and was not used except when the power was turned on. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is used both as an operation means for switching set values and as an operation means for erasing information stored in the game RAM 104 and the like, thereby reducing the number of parts. is possible.

However, when the setting change mode is set, even if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 at the timing of the pressing operation, and the payout RAM 174 are stored. This does not mean that the information related to payouts that has been stored will be deleted. This is because if the game control microcomputer 101 or the payout control microcomputer 171 erases the stored information each time the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the control process becomes complicated. . In this way, while the setting change mode is set, the information stored in the game RAM 104 and the payout RAM 174 is not erased, and the control processing of the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 is complicated. prevent it from becoming

As shown in FIG. 26(B), after the set value "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 when the setting change mode is entered, for example, if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, , the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 displays the set value "2". That is, the display of the set value "1" is switched to the display of the set value "2". This allows the setting changer to know that the setting value has been changed to "2".

Further, as shown in FIG. 26C, on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, a setting value change image YG (change suggesting image) showing an upward arrow is displayed overlying the setting changing image SH. be done. By displaying the setting value change image YG, it is possible for the setting changer to understand that the setting value has been changed (increased). Note that the setting value change image YG is displayed for several seconds after the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed and then disappears, and only the setting changing image SH is displayed again on the display screen 50a.

Also, as shown in FIG. 26(C), speaker 620 outputs a voice saying "The set value has been changed." This voice "The setting value has been changed" makes it possible for the setting changer to understand that the setting value has been changed. Note that the voice "The setting value has been changed" is output only once, and after that, the voice "The setting can be changed" is repeatedly output as described above.

Also, as shown in FIG. 26C, the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special second light emission mode. Light emission in the second light emission mode enables the setting changer to recognize that the setting value has been changed. The light emission in the second light emission mode is performed for several seconds after the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, and after that, the light emission returns to the first light emission mode as described above.

Subsequently, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed while the set value "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 as shown in FIG. A set value “3” is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the segment display 300 . That is, the display of the set value "2" is switched to the display of the set value "3". This allows the setting changer to know that the setting value has been changed to "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 26(D), a setting value change image YG is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, and a voice saying "The setting value has been changed" is output from the speaker 620, and the frame lamp is displayed. 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special second lighting manner. By these means, it is possible for the setting changer to recognize that the setting value has been changed again.

By the way, the setting changer basically faces the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1 (see FIG. 8), and looks at the 7-segment display 300 when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed. Therefore, it is difficult for a setting changer to grasp the display of the setting value change image YG on the display screen 50a and the light emission in the special second light emission mode from the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp . Therefore, the display of the set value change image YG and the light emission in the special second light emission mode are mainly aimed at the employees of the game hall around the pachinko game machine PY1 to inform them that the set values have been changed. It means to suggest (notify). In this way, employees of surrounding game arcades can know that the setting values have been changed, so that they can know that the setting values have not been illegally changed.

In particular, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, as shown in FIGS. 26C and 26D, the setting value change image YG is displayed on the display screen 50a rather than the setting change image SH (mode suggestion). display (suggestion of change) is preferentially executed. In addition, the speaker 620 outputs a voice saying "The setting value has been changed" (suggestion of change) rather than outputting a voice saying "The setting can be changed" (suggestion of mode). Further, the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special second light emission mode (change suggestion) with priority over light emission in a special first light emission mode (mode suggestion). In this way, by suggesting that the setting value has been changed rather than suggesting that the setting value can be changed, if the setting value is changed illegally, the employees of the surrounding amusement parks It is possible to make it easier for employees to notice fraudulent activity.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 26C and 26D, the setting value change image YG does not show the setting value itself to be changed, but simply shows that the setting value has been changed. Also, the voice saying "The setting value has been changed" does not indicate the setting value itself to be changed, but simply indicates that the setting value has been changed. In this way, when the setting change mode is set, setting values are not indicated by presentation means such as the image display device 50 and the speaker 620, except for the 7-segment display 300 that is mainly viewed only by the setting changer. Therefore, even if the employees of the surrounding amusement arcades can grasp the situation in which the setting value can be changed and that the setting value has been changed, they cannot grasp the value of the setting value itself. Therefore, even if an outsider such as a player views the display screen 50a or hears the sound from the speaker 620 in the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent the set value from being grasped.

Next, a method for determining the set values will be described. In order to confirm the set value, it is necessary to use the setting key 184 to rotate the rotating portion 183 of the setting key cylinder 180 from the rotation position (ON position) toward the standby position (OFF position) in the setting change mode. be. As a result, the setting change mode is terminated, and the last setting value displayed in the setting change mode is confirmed. The operation of rotating the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) from the rotating position toward the standby position is appropriately called a "setting confirming operation".

When the setting confirmation operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 26(F), the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 displays a setting value confirmation image SK showing characters "The setting value is confirmed." . By displaying the setting value confirmation image SK, it is possible to let the setting changer or an employee of the surrounding game arcade know that the setting value is confirmed. Note that the setting value confirmation image SK is hidden after being displayed for a very short time after the setting confirmation operation is performed.

Also, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, a voice saying "the setting value has been confirmed" is output from the speaker 620, as shown in FIG. 26(F). This voice saying "the set value has been finalized" makes it possible for the setting changer or an employee of the surrounding game arcade to understand that the set value has been finalized. Note that the voice saying "The setting value has been confirmed" is output only once at the timing when the setting confirmation operation is performed.

Further, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special third light emission mode, as shown in FIG. 26(F). By emitting light in the third light emitting mode, it is possible to let the setting changer or an employee of the surrounding game arcade know that the set value has been fixed. It should be noted that the light emission in the third light emission mode ends after being executed for a very short time after the setting confirming operation is performed.

Here, in this embodiment, when the setting confirmation operation is performed and the setting change mode ends, the setting value displayed in the lighting mode (changeable mode) on the 7-segment display 300 (for example, " 3”) disappears. That is, the set value is hidden (non-display mode). Then, the 7-segment display 300 performs an initial display (see FIG. 26F) instead. In this way, the person who changes the setting can understand that the setting value has been finalized by changing the setting value from the lighting mode to the non-display mode. Furthermore, by not displaying the setting value after it is determined, it is possible to make it difficult for the surroundings to notice the determined setting value.

When the setting values are determined in this way, as shown in FIG. (see FIG. 24) lights up. By lighting all the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 in this way, it is possible to clearly indicate to the setting changer who has performed the setting confirming operation that the initial display is executed.

The meaning of the initial display on the 7-segment display 300 is as follows. The 7-segment display 300 displays the set value as described above, and also displays the base as described later. However, the set value or base displayed on the 7-segment display 300 is based on the premise that the 7-segment display 300 is functioning normally, and if the 7-segment display 300 itself fails or malfunctions, , or the possibility of unauthorized modification is not completely eliminated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the setting change mode ends, the initial display is automatically performed on the 7-segment display 300 . This allows the setting changer to know that the 7-segment display 300 is functioning normally. In other words, it is possible to confirm that the set values displayed in the setting change mode are correct. Additionally, it is possible to recognize that bases displayed after the initial display will also be displayed correctly. If the setting change mode is not entered when the power is turned on, the initial display is performed on the 7-segment display 300 immediately after the power is turned on.

By the way, in this embodiment, the setting change mode is terminated before the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is rotated to the standby position by the setting confirmation operation. Specifically, the moment the setting key 184 begins to move from the rotating position toward the standby position, the setting change mode ends and the set value is determined. Therefore, below, while explaining the configuration of the setting key cylinder switch 180a provided inside the setting key cylinder 180 and the configuration of the electric circuit around the game control microcomputer 101, the setting value confirmation timing will be explained in detail. do.

As shown in FIG. 27, the game control microcomputer 101 is provided with an input terminal P14 (see FIGS. 28(A), (B) and (C)). The input terminal P14 receives a switch signal of either "H" level (voltage higher than the upper limit threshold voltage) or "L" level (voltage lower than the lower limit threshold voltage) from the signal line E1. there is Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON when a switch signal (first signal) of "H" level is input from the signal line E1, and "L" level is input from the signal line E1. is input, it is determined that the setting key cylinder switch 180a is OFF.

The signal line E1 is connected to the terminal s1 of the setting key cylinder switch 180a. A ground line E4 extending toward the ground G from the branched portion QQ1 of the signal line E1 is provided. A resistor T2 is connected in series to the ground line E4, and the resistor T2 makes it difficult for current to flow from the signal line E1 to the ground line E4. In this manner, the signal line E1 extending from the input terminal P14 is connected to the setting key cylinder switch 180a, and the ground line E4 is connected at the branch portion QQ1 between the setting key cylinder switch 180a and the input terminal P14. ing. The resistor T2 is used as a pull-down resistor. Therefore, in the signal line E1, the level of the switch signal is set to "L" level unless DC 5V power is supplied through the setting key cylinder switch 180a.

The setting key cylinder switch 180a is provided with a terminal s2. A power line E2 is connected to the terminal s2, and power of DC 5V is supplied to the power line E2. In FIG. 27, the symbol Vc means that DC 5V power is supplied. A resistor T3 is connected in series to the power line E2. A terminal s3 is provided on the setting key cylinder switch 180a. A ground line E3 extending toward the ground G is connected to the terminal s3.

Here, the setting key cylinder switch 180a is provided with a switching piece s4. One end of the switching piece s4 is connected to the terminal s1. On the other hand, the other end of the switching piece s4 can be brought into contact with the terminal s2 or the terminal s3 by rotating the setting key 184 by the person who changes the settings. Thus, when the setting key 184 is at the standby position, the switching piece s4 is in contact with the terminal s3 (see the solid line in FIG. 27), and when the setting key 184 is at the rotating position, the switching piece s4 is in contact with the terminal s2. (See FIG. 28(A)).

Next, the timing for determining the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 28A shows the state of the setting key cylinder switch 180a when the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is in the rotating position. At this time, the terminals s1 and s2 are in a conducting state, and the DC 5V power supplied to the power line E2 is supplied to the signal line E1 via the setting key cylinder switch 180a. As a result, an "H" level switch signal is input to the input terminal P14 of the game control microcomputer 101 from the signal line E1. In this way, while the switch signal of "H" level is input to the input terminal P14 of the game control microcomputer 101, the setting change mode is entered.

Then, the setting changer rotates the setting key cylinder 180 from the rotation position toward the standby position by performing the setting confirming operation. FIG. 28B shows the state of the setting key cylinder switch 180a at the moment when the setting key 184 starts rotating from the rotating position. As shown in FIG. 28B, when the switching piece s4 is separated from the terminal s2, the terminals s1 and s2 are brought out of conduction. Therefore, the 5V DC power supplied to the power line E2 is no longer supplied to the signal line E1 via the setting key cylinder switch 180a. At this time, since the signal line E1 connected to the input terminal P14 is connected to the ground line E4 at the branch portion QQ1, the switch signal is switched from "H" level to "L" level. In other words, the input terminal P14 of the game control microcomputer 101 receives an "L" level switch signal. As a result, the setting change mode is terminated and the set value is determined.

FIG. 28C shows the state of the setting key cylinder switch 180a when the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is at the standby position. When the setting changer completely rotates the setting key cylinder 180 to the standby position by confirming the setting, the switching piece s4 contacts the terminal s3. At this time, as in the above case, the 5 VDC power supplied to the power line E2 is not supplied to the signal line E1 via the setting key cylinder switch 180a, so the switch signal remains at the "L" level.

As can be seen from the above description, the timing for determining the setting value is the timing shown in FIG. 28B, and the setting change mode ends as soon as the setting key cylinder 180 starts rotating from the rotational position. Therefore, immediately after starting the setting confirmation operation, the setting changer hides the setting value (for example, the setting value "3" shown in FIG. 26D) that was displayed on the 7-segment display 300 in the setting change mode. (See FIG. 26(F)). In other words, it is possible to hide the setting value on the 7-segment display 300 before the setting key 184 has finished rotating to the standby position. In this way, by hiding the setting value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 as soon as possible, it is possible to minimize the risk that the fixed setting value will be grasped by the surroundings.

In addition, when a busy game hall employee (setting changer) performs a setting confirmation operation before the opening of the game hall, the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is correctly rotated to the standby position by careless or unfamiliar operation. It may not let you. However, even if such a situation occurs, the switch signal input to the game control microcomputer 101 switches from the "H" level to the "L" level (see FIGS. 28A and 28B), so the setting It is possible to commit and hide the value. Therefore, it is possible to terminate the setting change mode even if the setting changer performs careless or unfamiliar operation, and it is possible to prevent the setting value from being continuously displayed on the 7-segment display 300. . Furthermore, as the timing at which the setting change mode ends is early, the display of the setting changing image SH, the output of the sound "The setting can be changed", and the mode indication of light emission in the special first light emission mode are ended. The timing will be early. Therefore, even if the setting key cylinder 180 is not correctly rotated to the standby position due to carelessness or inexperienced operation, it is possible to prevent the situation that the setting value can be changed from being continuously suggested.

On the other hand, in order to shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) must be firmly moved from the standby position (see FIG. 28(C)) to the rotating position (FIG. 28(A)). must be rotated. In other words, if the setting key 184 is halfway rotated from the standby position due to an unfamiliar operation of the setting changer, vibration, or the like, the switch signal is not switched from the "L" level to the "H" level (see FIG. 28). (B)), it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode. In this way, the setting value can be changed only when the setting changer has reliably rotated the setting key 184 to the rotation position, thereby preventing an unintended shift to the setting change mode as much as possible. be.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 29, the setting key cylinder 180 is arranged to the left of the 7-segment display 300 . In other words, on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1, the setting key cylinder 180 is arranged to the right of the 7-segment display 300 when viewed from the setting changer. The power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 are positioned below the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180 and closer to the setting key cylinder 180 than the 7-segment display 300 (as seen from the setting changer). located on the right side of the setting key cylinder 180). Also, the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 are arranged side by side along the horizontal direction.

When changing the settings (set values), the person who changes the settings first opens the inner frame 21 so that the back side of the inner frame 21 can be touched. Open the opening/closing cover 25a. As a result, the setting key 184 can be inserted into the setting key cylinder 180 mounted on the game control board 100 arranged inside the outer cover 25 .

Here, most setting changers attempt to operate the setting key 184 with their right hand, which is their dominant hand. At this time, assuming that the setting key cylinder 180 is to the left of the 7-segment display 300 as seen from the setting changer (that is, from the perspective of the person facing the setting key cylinder 180), the setting changer's right hand (or The right arm) may cover the 7-segment display 300, making it difficult to see the display contents (set values) of the 7-segment display 300.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the setting key cylinder 180 is arranged to the right of the 7-segment display 300 when viewed from the setting changer. This prevents the right hand (or right arm) of the setting changer from covering the 7-segment display 300 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 from becoming difficult to see. This kind of positional relationship makes it difficult to see the setting value immediately before confirmation (the setting value immediately before being hidden), especially when confirming the setting, and it is difficult to know what setting value has been confirmed. effective in preventing

Further, in this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 used for the switching operation of the setting value is located below the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180, and is lower than the setting key cylinder 180 as seen from the setting changer. placed on the right. Therefore, when the setting changer performs the setting value switching operation with the right hand, which is the dominant hand, the right hand (or right arm) of the setting changer does not cover the 7-segment display 300 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the visibility of the 7-segment display 300 during the setting value switching operation. In addition, since the RAM clear switch 191 is located closer to the setting key cylinder 180 than the 7-segment display 300, the setting changer can use the dominant hand (right hand) that operates the setting key cylinder 180 to clear the RAM with a small number of operations. It is possible to operate the switch 191 .

Further, in this embodiment, the power switch 195 used for setting change mode transition operation is also provided at a position closer to the setting key cylinder 180 than the 7-segment display 300 , like the RAM clear switch 191 . Therefore, the setting changer can operate the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 with a few movements using the dominant hand (right hand) that operates the setting key cylinder 180 . In particular, since the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 are arranged side by side with a short interval, a setting changer can easily operate both the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 at the same time with only one hand. . It should be noted that the right hand (or right arm) of the setting changer does not cover the 7-segment display 300 even when the setting change mode transition operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the visibility of the 7-segment display 300 when shifting to the setting change mode.

If the above effect is not expected, set the RAM clear switch 191 to a position below the 7-segment display 300 and closer to the 7-segment display 300 than the setting key cylinder 180 (for example, to a pachinko game machine). It may be provided at a position on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction on the back side of PY1 (or at least a position on the left side of the setting key cylinder 180). With such a configuration, the setting changer can operate the RAM clear switch 191 with the left hand while holding the setting key 184 with the right hand (that is, while standing by for operation of the setting key 184). Even in such an operating situation, both the right hand (or the right arm) and the left hand (or the left arm) do not cover the 7-segment display 300, so that the operability of setting change and the visibility of the 7-segment display 300 are improved. It is possible to

Next, returning to FIG. 27, the LED driver 350 will be described. The LED driver 350 is integrally incorporated inside the 7-segment display 300 and is not mounted on the game control board 100 . Thus, by using the general-purpose 7-segment display device 300 incorporating the LED driver 350, the space for mounting the LED driver on the game control board 100 becomes unnecessary. As a result, it is possible to control the display of the 7-segment display device 300 while reducing the burden of changing the design of the game control board 100 .

As shown in FIG. 27, the game control microcomputer 101 is provided with a serial data transmission terminal TX3. Also, the LED driver 350 is provided with a serial data reception terminal RXD. The serial data transmission terminal TX3 and the serial data reception terminal RXD are connected by a serial data line E5. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101 can control driving of the LED driver 350 by transmitting serial data via the serial data line E5. As a result, the 7-segment display 300 can perform display control of set values, initial display, and display control of a base, which will be described later. Thus, by performing display control by serial communication, it is possible to simplify the wiring on the game control board 100 as compared with the case of performing display control by parallel communication. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the burden of design changes to the game control board 100 .

As shown in FIG. 27, a damping resistor T4 is serially connected to the serial data line E5. This damping resistor T4 can attenuate noise on the serial data line E5. Also, the LED driver 350 is provided with an RST terminal. A reset signal line E6 is connected to the RST terminal. The reset signal line E6 is a line to which a reset signal is transmitted from the power supply unit 190 via the payout control board 170, and the capacitor CA5 is connected in parallel with the reset signal line E6. This capacitor CA5 can prevent the reset signal from dropping to the "L" level due to static electricity or the like despite the fact that the reset signal is at the "H" level.

Next, the case where the pachinko game machine PY1 does not store the information indicating the set value (set value information) will be described. The set value information is stored in the set value information storage unit 107 (set value information storage means, see FIG. 6) of the game RAM 104 each time the set value is selected (changed) in the setting change mode. However, when the pachinko game machine PY1 is shipped from the production factory (factory shipment), the setting value information storage unit 107 does not store the setting value information. In other words, no set value is set. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the set value information storage unit 107 is a storage area (storage means) provided in the game RAM 104, but is provided separately from the game RAM 104. It may be a storage means that has a

In this pachinko game machine PY1, when the power is turned on in a state in which no set value is set, the machine can shift to an error mode. Even if no setting value is set, if the setting change mode transition operation is performed, the setting change mode is entered instead of the error mode. The error mode is a mode in which the pachinko game machine PY1 cannot perform game control, and is not canceled unless the power switch 195 is operated to turn off the power.

In the error mode, as shown in FIG. 30(A), in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, the lighting portions LB25, LB28, LB29, LB30, and LB31 (see FIG. 21) are changed to "E ” in an error lighting manner. This light emission makes it possible for employees of the game arcade to recognize that the error mode has been entered, that is, that the set value has not been set. Light emission in this error lighting mode (error indication) continues until the error mode is canceled by shutting off the power supply.

Further, in the error mode, as shown in FIG. 30(B), an operation suggesting image SE showing characters "The setting value is not set. Please perform an operation to shift to the setting change mode" is displayed on the display screen 50a. Is displayed. The display of the operation suggesting image SE (error notification) enables the employee of the game arcade to grasp the situation in which the set value must be set. The display of the operation suggestion image SE continues until the error mode is canceled by turning off the power.

In the error mode, a special error sound is output from the speaker 620 as shown in FIG. 30(B). Also, at this time, as shown in FIG. 30B, the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special error light emission mode. The output of the error sound (error notification) and the light emission in the error light emission mode (error notification) make it possible for the staff of the game arcade to recognize that the error mode has been entered. The output of the error sound and the light emission in the error light emission mode continue until the error mode is canceled by turning off the power.

Here, in this embodiment, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 is not erased even if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on. Therefore, once the setting value information is stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 by performing the setting change mode transition operation after shipment from the factory, the setting value information is not stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 after that. does not occur. Therefore, in this case, when the power is turned on after the next time, the error mode will not be entered. In short, the transition to the error mode occurs when the setting value is never set and the setting change mode transition operation is not performed when the power is turned on. In this manner, even when the RAM clear switch 191 is simply pressed or when the power is not turned on (shutdown state), the set value information is not erased, thereby preventing an unnecessary transition to the error mode. It is possible to prevent it. The set value information storage unit 107 is composed of volatile storage means (DRAM) so as to be able to cope with relatively many (frequent) accesses. may be configured.

8. Display of Base Next, display of the base will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. In this embodiment, the 7-segment display 300 can display the base. The base is the ratio of the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by the player to the number of shot balls (total number of shot balls), which is the number of game balls shot by the player. By checking the base on the 7-segment display 300, it is possible to know whether the pachinko game machine PY1 has been illegally modified or has a failure or malfunction.

The base explained in this form means the base in the normal game state to the last, the base in the jackpot game state, the base in the high probability state and time saving state, the base in the normal probability state and time saving state, It does not mean the base from the time the power is turned on to the present time. In other words, the base described below in this embodiment is the number of shot balls (total number of shot balls), which is the number of game balls shot by the player in the normal game state, It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls). Therefore, the total number of shot balls or the number of prize balls described below means the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls in the normal game state.

In this form, the base is newly calculated each time the total number of shot balls reaches 60,000. Then, the base information (base information) calculated each time 60000 shots are reached is sequentially stored in the base information storage section 108 (see FIG. 6) of the game RAM 104 . However, information on the base currently being calculated (hereinafter referred to as the "current base") and the base calculated when the total number of shots reached 60000 before the current base calculation started (hereinafter referred to as "1 time information of the base calculated when the total number of shot balls reached 60,000 before the first base (hereinafter referred to as the "second base"), and information of the base calculated twice before the base The base information storage unit 108 stores information up to the base calculated when the total number of balls shot reaches 60,000 before the previous base (hereinafter referred to as "three times previous base"). Thus, in the 7-segment display 300, based on the current base information, the 1st previous base information, the 2nd previous base information, and the 3rd previous base information stored in the base information storage unit 108, , current base, 1 time previous base, 2 times previous base, and 3 times previous base may be displayed.

The timing of starting the display of the base differs depending on whether or not the setting change mode has been entered, that is, whether or not the setting change mode transfer operation has been performed. When the setting change mode transition operation is performed, the setting change mode is transitioned to after the power is turned on as described above. In this case, after the setting change mode is terminated and the initial display is performed on the 7-segment display 300, the display of the base is started. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without performing the setting change mode transition operation, the 7-segment display 300 performs an initial display immediately after the power is turned on, and then the display of the base is started. In either case, there is no change in that the 7-segment display 300 starts displaying the base after the initial display.

As shown in FIG. 31(A), when the initial display is started on the 7-segment display 300, the initial display is performed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). After that, as the initial display ends, the display of the current base starts as shown in FIG. 31(B). When the current base is displayed here, the current base (for example, "36") is displayed in two digits (percentage display) in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. . Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a lighting mode (a mode in which they continue to emit light) so as to indicate "bL.". That is, it means that the bass is currently displayed when the light emission in the lighting mode of "bL." is seen.

The current-based display shown in FIG. 31(B) is executed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). After that, when the display of the current base ends, if the information of the previous base is stored in the base information storage unit 108, the display of the previous base starts as shown in FIG. 31(C). When the previous base is displayed here, the previous base (for example, "37") is displayed in two digits in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. . Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a lighting manner to indicate "b1.". That is, it means that the previous base is displayed when the light emission of the lighting mode of "b1." is seen.

The one-previous-based display shown in FIG. 31(C) is performed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). After that, when the display of the one-time previous base ends, if the information of the two-time previous base is stored in the base information storage unit 108, the display of the two-time previous base is started as shown in FIG. be. Here, when the second previous base is displayed, the second previous base (for example, "35") is displayed in two digits in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. . Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a lighting manner to indicate "b2.". That is, if the light emission of the lighting mode of "b2." is seen, it means that the second previous base is displayed.

The display of the two-time previous base shown in FIG. 31(D) is performed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). After that, when the display of the 2nd previous base is finished, if the information of the 3rd previous base is stored in the base information storage unit 108, the display of the 3rd previous base is performed as shown in FIG. be started. Here, when the 3rd previous base is displayed, the 3rd previous base (for example, "38") is displayed in two digits in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. . Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a lighting manner to indicate "b3.". That is, it means that the 3rd previous base is displayed when the light emission of the lighting mode of "b3." is seen.

The 3 times previous base display shown in FIG. 31(D) is executed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). After that, when the display of the three times previous base ends, the display of the current base starts again as shown in FIG. 31(B). Thereafter, at predetermined specific time intervals, the current base display shown in FIG. 31(B), the one previous base display shown in FIG. The display and the display of the 3rd previous base shown in FIG. 31(E) are repeatedly executed. The current base, 1st previous base, 2nd previous base, and 3rd previous base are displayed in units of 1%, but may be displayed in units of 5%, for example, and may be changed as appropriate. It is possible.

By the way, FIG. 31(C) shows the case where the previous base is displayed when information about the previous base is stored in the base information storage unit 108 . On the other hand, when the base information storage unit 108 does not store the information of the previous base, the display shown in FIG. 32(C) is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 32(C), in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, the lighting portions LB23 and LB31 (see FIG. 24) are displayed to indicate "--". It emits light in a lighting mode. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a blinking mode (a mode in which light emission and light extinguishing are repeated) so as to indicate "b1.". In this way, the blinking light emission of "b1." and the display of "--" indicate that the previous base cannot be displayed yet.

In the same way, when the information of the second previous base is not stored in the base information storage unit 108, as shown in FIG. In the region 340, the lighting portions LB23 and LB31 emit light in a lighting manner to indicate "--". Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a blinking manner so as to indicate "b2.". In this way, the flashing light emission of "b2." and the display of "--" indicate that the second previous base is still undisplayable.

When the base information storage unit 108 does not store the information of the base three times before, as shown in FIG. , and “--”, the lighting portions LB23 and LB31 emit light in a lighting mode. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a blinking manner so as to indicate "b3.". In this way, the flashing light emission of "b3." and the display of "--" indicate that the 3rd previous base is still undisplayable. The base information storage unit 108 is composed of volatile storage means (DRAM) so as to be able to handle relatively many (frequent) accesses, but is composed of non-volatile storage means (EEPROM, etc.), for example. It's okay to be.

9. Transition after power-on Next, the transition after power-on in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described by dividing it into various operations. When the power is turned on, the power switch 195 is switched from the OFF operation (OFF state) to the ON operation (ON state). After the power is turned on, there are five cases shown below.

First, as a first case, there is a case where a setting change mode transition operation is performed. In this case, as soon as the power is turned on, the setting change mode is entered as described above. Once the setting change mode is entered, the setting change mode is not terminated unless the setting key 184 is rotated from the rotating position toward the standby position. When the setting change mode ends, the initial display is performed on the 7-segment display 300 as described above, and then the base is displayed (see FIG. 31).

In this embodiment, the setting change mode transition operation includes pressing the RAM clear switch 191 when the power is turned on. However, when the setting change mode is set as described above, the game-related information stored in the game RAM 104 is not erased. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the setting change mode ends, the game-related information is automatically erased before the game-related processing (the game control processing from step S101 to step S106 shown in FIG. 51) is executed. ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being restarted in a state in which the game-related information stored before the power is turned on remains even though the setting value is changed in the setting change mode. When the setting change mode ends, the game information is erased without pressing the RAM clear switch 191 again. is possible.

However, when the information related to the game is erased after the setting change mode ends, the setting value information stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 is not erased. This is because, if the setting value information is also erased along with the erasing of the game-related information, the setting values determined in the setting change mode become meaningless. By not erasing the setting value information in this way, the setting value information remains stored even when the power is turned on next time. As a result, it is not necessary for the employee of the game arcade to set the setting value again when the same setting value as last time is acceptable, and it is possible to avoid an increase in the operation burden.

As described above, when the setting change mode ends, the game control microcomputer 101 erases the information related to the game. After that, by the main side timer interrupt processing (S005, see FIG. 39), which will be described later, the processing related to the game (game control processing from step S101 to step S106) is executed, and the initial display and base display on the 7 segment display 300 are executed. Processing related to display (base display processing in step S108) is executed.

Next, as a second case, there is a case where setting value information is not stored and the setting change mode transition operation is not performed when the power is turned on. In this case, as soon as the power is turned on, the error mode is entered as described above. In the error mode, as shown in FIG. 30(A), the 7-segment display 300 emits light in an error lighting manner to indicate the letter "E". As a result, it is possible for an employee of the amusement arcade who sees the character "E" instead of the setting value on the 7-segment display 300 to know that the setting value has not yet been set. Also, in the error mode, as shown in FIG. 30B, a special error sound is output from the speaker 620, and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special error light emission mode. As a result, it is possible to indicate the transition to the error mode in a more comprehensible manner than when the character "E" is indicated by the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 8) on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the person who turned on the power switch 195 and the employees of the surrounding game arcades to recognize that the pachinko game machine PY1 is in a situation where the game cannot be executed. Once the error mode is entered, the error mode cannot be released until the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power is turned on next time, it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and set the setting values (storing the setting value information).

As a third case, the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on while the set value information is stored. However, in the third case, the setting key cylinder 180 is not rotated to the movement position when the power switch 195 is switched from the OFF operation to the ON operation. In this case, as soon as the power is turned on, the game-related information stored in the game RAM 104 is deleted without shifting to the setting change mode. However, even at this time, the setting value information stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 is not deleted. This is because, if the set value information is erased, it is necessary to perform a setting change mode shift operation so as not to shift to the error mode when the power is turned on next time, which causes complication of the operation. Thus, after the game-related information is erased, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the game-related processing (game control processing from step S101 to step S106) by main-side timer interrupt processing (S005, see FIG. 39), which will be described later. ) is executed, and the processing relating to the initial display and base display on the 7-segment display 300 (base display processing in step S108) is executed.

As a fourth case, the setting key 184 is rotated to the rotation position when the power is turned on while the setting value information is stored. However, in the fourth case, the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed when the power switch 195 is switched from OFF to ON. In this case, as soon as the power is turned on, the mode is shifted to the set value confirmation mode without shifting to the setting change mode. The setting value confirmation mode is a mode in which the setting values based on the stored setting value information are confirmed although the setting values cannot be selected unlike the setting change mode. For example, when setting value information indicating that the setting value is "1" is stored and the mode is shifted to the setting value confirmation mode, the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 emits light to indicate "1". do. This set value confirmation mode is terminated after a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the 7-segment display 300 started displaying the set values. In this way, if the employee of the game hall simply wants to confirm which set value is used without erasing (ram clearing) the information related to the game when the power is turned on, he or she can shift to the set value confirmation mode. , it is possible to check the current setting value.

For example, the following cases are conceivable for shifting to the set value confirmation mode. Malfunction of the image display device 50 or malfunction of the movable members (the board movable body 55k, the frame movable body provided in the game machine frame 2, the AT opening/closing member 14k, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k, etc.) during the game by the player may occur. In this case, in order to solve the problem described above, the employee of the game arcade may turn off the power switch 195 and then turn it on again to turn on the power. At this time, since the game is interrupted, the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed when the power is turned on so as not to erase the information related to the game. However, an employee of the game hall may want to check the setting value that has been set. Therefore, in such a case, by setting the setting key 184 to the rotating position when the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to the setting value confirmation mode, and it is possible to confirm the setting value on the 7-segment display 300. be. At this time, the setting value is displayed only on the 7-segment display 300, and the setting value is not suggested by the rendering means such as the image display device 50 and the speaker 620. FIG. This is to prevent the player from grasping the set values. It should be noted that the image display device 50, the speaker 620, or the like may be used to perform an effect suggesting that the mode is set to the set value confirmation mode.

When the set value confirmation mode is completed, the game control microcomputer 101 basically does not clear the information related to the game, and executes the processing related to the game (step Game control processing from S101 to step S106) is executed, and processing related to initial display and base display on the 7-segment display 300 (base display processing of step S108) is executed. However, if it is determined that the checksum of the game RAM 104 and the checksum of the game RAM 104 stored (memorized) at the time of power failure do not match before executing the processing related to the game, exceptionally The information related to the game is cleared, assuming that the contents stored in the game RAM 104 are abnormal.

Finally, as a fifth case, there is a case where the power switch 195 is simply switched from the OFF operation to the ON operation while the set value information is stored. That is, the fifth case is when the setting key 184 is not rotated to the rotation position and the RAM clear switch 191 is not depressed when the power is turned on. In this case, there is no transition to the setting change mode or the set value confirmation mode after the power is turned on. Therefore, as soon as the power is turned on, the game control microcomputer 101 basically does not clear the information related to the game and executes the processing related to the game. Execute the relevant processing. However, if it is determined that the checksum of the game RAM 104 and the checksum of the game RAM 104 stored at the time of power failure do not match before executing the processing related to the game, the Information is cleared.

10. Setting Value Change Suggestion In this embodiment, when a setting value is changed in the setting change mode as described above, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 displays a setting value change image YG (change suggestion image) showing an upward arrow. ) is displayed, a voice saying “The setting value has been changed” is output from the speaker 620, and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special second light emission mode (Fig. 26 (C ), see FIG. 26(D)). After that, when the setting is confirmed, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 displays a setting value confirmation image SK indicating the characters "The setting value is confirmed." has been confirmed." is output, and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special third light emission mode (see FIG. 26(F)). These are intended to let the setting changer or an employee of the surrounding game arcade know that the setting value has been changed or that the setting value has been determined, but not to the player.

However, even after the setting change mode ends, for example, the setting value before the power is cut off is changed to another setting value, and the setting confirmation operation is performed with the changed setting value. If there is no suggestion at all, the player who comes to the store first thing in the morning cannot grasp that the set value has been changed. As a result, the player who purposely visits the store first thing in the morning may not be motivated to play a game with the pachinko game machine provided with the set values. Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the power is turned on, when the setting change mode is entered as described above, the setting value is changed from the setting value before the power is cut off to another setting value in the setting change mode, for example, There is a case where the set value change lamp 200 is turned on at a predetermined probability when the setting confirmation operation is performed and the setting change mode ends (see FIG. 33(A)).

In this embodiment, the setting value is changed, and the changed value is used to finalize the setting, and the setting change mode ends. The set value change lamp lighting lottery table shown in FIG. The setting value change lighting lottery random number takes a value in the range of 0-99. In the present embodiment, as described above, there are six types of set values (see FIG. 16), and the set value change lamp 200 is turned on according to the set value selected from the six set values. The ratio is different (see FIG. 33(A)).

When the set value is "1", if the obtained set value change lighting lottery random number is from "0" to "9", the set value is changed, and the setting change mode is entered by the setting confirmation operation. The rate at which the set value change lamp 200 lights up is 10% (see FIG. 33A). If the set value that is set next is "2", if the obtained set value change lighting lottery random number is "0" to "19", the setting change mode is terminated by the setting confirmation operation. Therefore, the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 lights is 20% (see FIG. 33(A)). Further, when the set value is "3", if the acquired set value change lighting lottery random number is from "0" to "29", the setting change mode is terminated by the setting confirmation operation. Therefore, the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 lights up is 30% (see FIG. 33(A)). In addition, when the set value is "4", if the obtained set value change lighting lottery random number is "0" to "39", the setting change mode is terminated by the setting confirmation operation. Accordingly, the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 lights is 40% (see FIG. 33(A)). Further, when the set value is "5", if the obtained set value change lighting lottery random number is from "0" to "49", the setting change mode is ended by the setting confirmation operation. Therefore, the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 lights up is 50% (see FIG. 33(A)). Finally, when the set value is "6", if the acquired set value change lighting lottery random number is "0" to "59", the setting change mode is terminated by the setting confirmation operation. Accordingly, the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 lights is 60% (see FIG. 33(A)).

Therefore, in the first form, among the six types of setting values (setting value "1", setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", setting value "5", setting value "6") , the setting value corresponding to the set value has a higher jackpot winning probability, the higher the rate at which the setting value change lamp 200 lights up (see FIG. 33(A)). As a result, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first form, the set value change lamp 200 lights up, so that not only is it understood that the set value has been changed, but also a set value with a high jackpot winning probability is set. It is possible to make people think that it might be possible. Therefore, not only the setting value is simply changed, but there is a possibility that the setting value with a high jackpot winning probability is set. It becomes possible.

Further, in this embodiment, the set value change lamp 200 is lit (see FIG. 33(A)), the player plays a game, the variable display of special symbols is started, and then the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and the special symbols are displayed. When the number of times the pattern is confirmed and displayed reaches 100 times (predetermined number of times) (predetermined termination condition), a set value change turn-off lottery random number is acquired. Then, a lottery as to whether or not to turn off the set value change lamp 200 is performed based on the acquired set value change turn-off lottery random number and the set value change lamp turn-off lottery table shown in FIG. 200 may be turned off (see FIG. 49). The set value change turn-off lottery random number takes a value in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, even if any set value is set from among the six types of set values described above, the set value change lamp 200 that is lit is extinguished at a rate of 80% (Fig. 33(B)). In addition, even if the variable display of the special symbols is started, the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and the number of times that the special symbols are fixed and displayed reaches 100 times, the set value change lamp 200 that is lit does not go out. In this case, the variable display of the special symbols is started again, the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the number of times the special symbols are fixed and displayed reaches 100 times, the set value change lamp 200 is extinguished. The lottery will be held again. Then, it is possible to win at a rate of 80% in the lottery, and if a winner is won, the setting value change lamp 200 that is lit will be extinguished.

The relationship between the set value change lamp and the variation display counter will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. In FIG. 34, the set value change lamp 200 is lit, and when the special symbol variable display is started, the number of times that the winning symbol or the losing symbol in the special symbol is confirmed and displayed reaches 100 times, and the setting during lighting It is assumed that the value change lamp 200 is extinguished. First, in the setting change mode, at the same time that the setting changer confirms the setting, the set value change lamp is changed based on the acquired set value change lighting lottery random number and the set value change lamp lighting lottery table shown in FIG. A lottery is conducted to determine whether or not the lamp 200 is lit, and the set value change lamp 200 is lit as shown in FIG. After that, the variable display of the special symbols is started, and when the number of times the winning or losing special symbols are fixedly displayed becomes one, the value of the variable display counter becomes one. Here, the variable display counter is a counter that counts the number of times that the variable display of the special symbols is started after the set value change lamp 200 is turned on, and the winning symbols or the losing symbols of the special symbols are fixedly displayed. . The variable display counter is initially set to "0".

After that, even if the value of the variable display counter increases from 1 to 99, the set value change lamp 200 remains lit. However, at the same time as the value of the variable display counter reaches 100, that is, after the set value change lamp 200 lights up, the variable display of the special symbols is started, and the number of times that the special symbols are winning symbols or the losing symbols are confirmed and displayed. At the same time as reaching 100 times, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to turn off the lit set value change lamp 200 based on the acquired set value change turn off lottery random number and the set value change lamp turn off lottery table shown in FIG. 33(B). , and the set value change lamp 200 is extinguished as shown in FIG. As a result, the next time the set value change lamp 200 can be lit is when the power is turned off and then turned on, the set value is changed in the setting change mode, and the setting is confirmed. When the change mode ends, it means that the lottery wins at a predetermined rate (see FIG. 33(A)).

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine (rotary drum type game machine, pachislot game machine) is known as a game machine in which one of a plurality of set values with different jackpot winning probabilities can be set. A conventional slot machine is capable of determining whether the power is simply turned on or the setting value is changed after the power is turned on, depending on whether or not reels are shaken in the first rotation. also existed. As a result, if it is possible to grasp that the setting value has been changed due to the shake of the reel in the first rotation, it is assumed that the setting value may have been changed to an advantageous setting value for the player. Attached.

However, in the case of a pachinko game machine in which one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot winning probabilities can be set, the setting value is changed only when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on. It is considered that there is no difference in appearance with a pachinko game machine like a slot machine. Therefore, compared to the slot machine, there is little motivation to play games from the first thing in the morning after opening the store, presuming that the set values may have been changed to be more advantageous for the player.

Further, in some conventional pachinko game machines, a stage exhibiting a high degree of expectation is selected by lot when the power is turned on, and the selected stage is displayed on the display screen of the image display device. With this configuration, by confirming the stage displayed on the display screen of the image display device, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game machine with a high probability from early in the morning. there were.

Therefore, even in a pachinko game machine in which any set value can be set from among a plurality of set values with different jackpot winning probabilities, it would be advantageous for the player if it could be configured so that there is a difference in the appearance of the player. Assuming that the set value may have been changed, it is possible to motivate the player to open the store and play the game from the first thing in the morning. Furthermore, the opening of the amusement arcade is not motivated by the fact that it may be possible to play games in a high-probability state from early in the morning, but by speculating that the setting values may have been changed to be advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player have a new motivation to play the game with the pachinko game machine that the game can be played first thing in the morning.

Therefore, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first form, the setting change mode transition operation is performed, and immediately after the power is turned on, the setting change mode is transitioned, and in the setting change mode, for example, the setting value before the power is cut off. There is a case where the setting value change lamp 200 is turned on at the same time as the setting change operation is performed so that the setting value can be changed to another setting value, the setting is confirmed, and the setting change mode ends (FIG. 33A). reference). As a result, the player can determine whether or not the set value has been changed before starting the game first thing in the morning, and play the game. Therefore, like a slot machine, it is possible to infer that the set values may have been changed to those that are advantageous to the player, and to motivate the player to start playing the game from the beginning of the morning after opening the store. In addition, instead of suggesting to the player that the high probability state exists, a new method of suggesting to the player that the power has been turned on and the set value has been changed has been adopted to allow the pachinko machine to start playing games. It is possible to increase the motivation to do.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first mode, when the set value change lamp 200 lights up and the number of times the variable display of the special symbols is performed reaches 100 times, the set value during lighting is changed at a rate of 80%. The lamp 200 is turned off (see FIG. 33(B)). As a result, the set value change lamp 200 lights up, and the information can be obtained until the number of times the variable display of the special symbols is performed reaches 100 times. become information. Therefore, the state is advantageous for the players who start playing the game from the first morning, and the players who have been playing the game from the first morning are motivated to continue playing. In this way, it becomes possible to contribute to the operation of the pachinko game machine after the game parlor opens.

For example, when a stage showing a high probability of expectation is drawn based on power-on, and the selected stage is displayed on the display screen of the image display device, the stage displayed on the display screen of the image display device is confirmed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game with the gaming machine, such as being able to play the game in a high probability state from the very beginning of the morning. As a result, the player can draw a lottery for special symbols in a high probability state from the first in the morning, and can win a jackpot in the lottery for special symbols relatively early. However, when the game progresses thereafter and returns to the normal game state (low-probability state and non-time-saving state), it is unknown whether the player will continue to play the pachinko game machine. Therefore, in a configuration in which high-probability expectations are reported based on power-on, it is possible to increase the motivation to play the game first thing in the morning, but the motivation to play the game after returning to the normal game state is reduced. can lead to However, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, by turning on the power and changing the setting value is determined by lighting of the setting value change lamp 200, a setting value with a high jackpot winning probability may be set. In addition to increasing the motivation to play the game from the beginning of the morning by guessing that there is no such thing, regardless of the game state such as the high probability state or the normal game state, the pachinko machine continues to play the game. It is possible to increase motivation. As a result, in addition to the conventional sales method using a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine that notifies high-probability expectations based on turning on the power), the setting value can be changed, and the setting value can be changed. Since it is possible to create a new sales method using a pachinko game machine that suggests that a game has been played, it is possible to diversify the sales method using a pachinko game machine by amusement parlors.

11. Setting Suggestion Effect, etc. In this embodiment, when the setting change mode is set as described above, the setting values are displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 in order to reduce the possibility that the setting values will be grasped by the surroundings as much as possible. No suggested image is displayed. However, even after the setting change mode ends, if no image suggesting the set value is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the set value will not be displayed to the player during the game. It becomes impossible to provide interest that makes you guess. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the setting change mode is finished, the setting suggesting effect may be executed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, so that the player can be entertained. On the display screen 50a of the present embodiment, as the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion by the symbol setting suggestion effect, the high setting suggestion effect, or the first winning prize ball suggestion effect may be executed.

First, the symbol setting suggestion effect will be described. The symbol setting suggesting effect is an effect of suggesting the set value set by either the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2 or the right effect symbol EZ3 when the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed in the losing pattern mode. is. The left effect symbol EZ1 means the effect symbol EZ stopped and displayed in the left effect symbol display area on the left side of the display screen 50a. The middle effect symbol EZ2 means the effect symbol EZ stopped and displayed in the middle effect symbol display area in the center of the display screen 50a. The right performance symbol EZ3 means the performance symbol EZ stopped and displayed in the right performance symbol display area on the right side of the display screen 50a.

As shown in FIG. 35, the effect pattern EZ has a display mode in which a portion indicating a number (number portion) and a portion indicating a character are combined, and there are nine types of effect pattern EZ. In the following, the effect symbol EZ whose number part is "1" is called the first effect symbol EZa, the effect symbol EZ whose number part is "2" is called the second effect symbol EZb, and the number part is "3". A certain production pattern EZ is called a third production pattern EZc, a production pattern EZ whose number part is "4" is called a fourth production pattern EZd, and a production pattern EZ whose number part is "5" is called a fifth production pattern EZe. , the effect symbol EZ whose number part is "6" is called the sixth effect symbol EZf, the effect symbol EZ whose number part is "7" is called the seventh effect symbol EZg, and the number part is "8". A given performance symbol EZ is called an eighth performance symbol EZh, and a performance symbol EZ having a numeral part of "9" is called a ninth performance symbol EZi.

The design setting suggesting effect is executed when the big hit is determined to be a loss. In this case, using the losing performance symbol lottery table shown in FIGS. 36(A) to (F), among the three performance symbols EZ (left performance symbol EZ1, medium performance symbol EZ2, right performance symbol EZ3) that are stopped and displayed One effect symbol EZ is determined. The losing performance symbol lottery tables shown in FIGS. 36A to 36F are provided according to the set values. Therefore, among the losing effect symbol lottery tables shown in FIGS. 36A to 36F, the table corresponding to the setting value currently set is used. As shown in FIGS. 36(A) to (F), among the first production pattern EZa to the ninth production pattern EZi, the ratio of the production pattern EZ corresponding to the set value to the other production patterns EZ ( Various losing effect pattern lottery tables are set so that the distribution rate) is high. It should be noted that it is determined by lottery which of the left performance symbol EZ1, the middle performance symbol EZ2, or the right performance symbol EZ3 is the performance symbol EZ determined on the various losing performance symbol lottery tables. The remaining two performance symbols EZ other than the performance symbols EZ determined on the losing performance symbol lottery table are determined by lottery using a performance symbol lottery table (not shown) based on the variation pattern.

As a result, for example, when the set value is set to "6", when the performance symbol EZ is stopped and displayed in the losing stop mode, any of the left performance symbol EZ1, the middle performance symbol EZ2, or the right performance symbol EZ3 The frequency that Ka is the sixth production symbol EZf increases. That is, after the variable effect is started as shown in FIG. 37(A), when the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 37(B), Any one of the three performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is likely to be stop-displayed at the sixth performance symbol EZf. As a result, the player can comprehend relatively many stop displays of the sixth effect symbol EZf, and it is possible to make the player guess that the set value is "6". In other words, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which performance symbol EZ has a high frequency of stop display even if the game is lost, and it is possible to provide a novel game interest.

Next, the high setting suggestion effect will be described. The high setting suggesting effect is a effect suggesting that the set value is a high setting such as "4", "5" or "6" when the effect symbol EZ is stop-displayed due to SP reach loss. This high setting suggestion effect may be executed only when the setting value is set to "4", "5" or "6", and the setting value is "1", "2" or "3". , it will not run if it is set to Therefore, the player can grasp that the set value is "4", "5" or "6" at the stage of grasping the execution of the high setting suggestion effect.

Here, the high setting suggestion effect of this form is based on the condition that the SP reach is lost, and the number of shots fired from power on is 10000, 20000, 30000, 40000, 50000, 600000. Executed when the condition being reached is met. The reason why the SP reach-losing condition is provided is that the player, who is greatly disappointed by the SP reach-losing, maintains the desire to play the game by executing the high-setting suggestion effect. Also, the reason why the condition that the number of shot balls reaches a multiple of 10,000 is provided is to make the high-setting suggestion effect a privilege that can be executed very rarely.

Specifically, the high setting suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. That is, after reaching reach, a battle effect is executed as SP reach as shown in FIG. 38(A). In FIG. 38A, as a battle effect, a battle image BT is displayed on the display screen 50a, showing that the main character and the rival character fight in baseball. After that, as shown in FIG. 38(A), a battle defeat effect is executed as SP reach loss. In FIG. 38B, as a battle defeat effect, a battle defeat image BH showing that the main character has been defeated by an enemy character is displayed on the display screen 50a. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38(C), the effect symbols EZ (left effect symbol EZ1, middle effect symbol EZ2, right effect symbol EZ3) are stop-displayed in a losing symbol mode (for example, "191"). In this way, the high setting suggesting effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, in FIG. 38(D), a phoenix image FT (suggestive effect image) showing that a phoenix appears flying is displayed on the display screen 50a as the high setting suggestive effect. As a result, the player who sees the phoenix image FT can understand that the set value is "4", "5", or "6", forgetting the disappointment of SP reach loss, and a large amount of money due to the high setting. It is possible to give an uplifting feeling.

12. Control Operation of Pachinko Game Machine Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 53, and the operation of the effect control microcomputer 121 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 will be described.

[Main Control Main Processing] The game control microcomputer 101 provided on the game control board 100 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 39 from the game ROM 103 when the power is turned on. Note that counters, timers, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 are provided in the game RAM 104 . The initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

As shown in FIG. 39, in the main control main process, first, a power-on process (S001), which will be described later, is performed. After power-on processing (S001), interrupts are prohibited (S002), and normal design/special design main random number update processing is executed (S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), various random number counter values shown in FIG. 15 are updated by adding one. When each random number counter value reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

When the normal design/special design main random number update process (S003) ends, the interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the game CPU 102, for example, at a 4 msec cycle. That is, it is executed at a cycle of 4 msec, for example. And, after the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is completed, before the next main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started, various counters by normal design / special design main random number update processing (S003) Value update processing is repeatedly executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt processing (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is permitted (S004).

[Power ON Processing] As shown in FIG. 40, in the power ON processing (S001), the game control microcomputer 101 first sets access permission to the game RAM 104 (S009). As a result, information can be written to and read from the game RAM 104 . Next, to the effect control board 120, a set value specifying command for notifying the information of the set value (set value information) stored in the set value information storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 is transmitted (S010). . As a result, when the effect control board 120 receives the set value designation command when the power is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 121 can grasp the set value set in the previous game. However, in the process of step S010, if the set value information is not yet stored in the set value information storage unit 107, the game control microcomputer 101 will not transmit the set value designation command.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 is ON (depressed) and the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON (ON state) (S011). That is, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode transition operation is being executed. If the setting change mode transition operation has been executed (YES in S011), the process proceeds to step S013 via the setting change mode process (S012) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S011 that the setting change mode transition operation has not been executed (NO in S011), then it is determined whether setting value information is stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 (S016). ). If the set value information is not stored (NO in S016), it means that the set value has not been set even once, and the process proceeds to error mode processing (S021) described later. On the other hand, if the set value information is stored (YES in S016), then it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 is ON (S017). In short, the process of step S017 is a process of determining whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 has been pressed, although the setting change mode is not entered. If the RAM clear switch 191 is ON (YES in S017), the process proceeds to step S013.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 191 is not ON (NO in S017), then it is determined whether or not the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON (S018). In short, the process of step S018 is the process of determining whether or not the setting key cylinder 180 is in the rotating position, although the setting change mode is not entered. If the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON (YES in S018), a set value confirmation mode process, which will be described later, is executed (S019), and the process proceeds to step S020. On the other hand, if the setting key cylinder switch 180a is not ON (NO in S018), it means that the RAM clear switch 191 was not pressed and the setting key cylinder 180 was not set to the rotating position when the power was turned on. In this case, the process proceeds to step S020 without executing the setting confirmation mode process of step S019. When the process proceeds to step S020, a power interruption restoration process, which will be described later, is executed, and the process proceeds to step S022.

In step S013, the information stored in the game RAM 104 is cleared (S013). However, at this time, the setting value information stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 and the information related to the base stored in the base information storage unit 108 (information on the total number of shot balls, information on the total number of winning balls, 1 information on the previous base, information on the basis of the second base, and information on the basis of the third base) are not cleared.

In this way, even if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on, the set value information is not cleared, so that the game can be restarted with the set values set before the power failure. In other words, it is possible to play a game without shifting to the setting change mode and setting the setting value each time the power is turned on. Even if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on, the information related to the base is not cleared. It is possible to display the base, 3 times previous base.

If the setting change mode transition operation is to be performed, YES is determined in step S011, and the process proceeds to step S012. In this case, the game-related information stored in the game RAM 104 is not cleared in step S013 until the setting change mode process in step S012 is completed. In short, when the setting change mode transition operation is performed, the game-related information stored in the game RAM 104 can be cleared after the setting change mode ends. On the other hand, when the setting key cylinder 180 is not in the rotational position when the power is turned on, but the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed down, YES is determined in step S017, and the process proceeds to step S013. Become. In this case, the game-related information stored in the game RAM 104 can be cleared immediately after the power is turned on.

After step S013, the game control microcomputer 101 initializes the work area of the game RAM 104 (S014). In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the game ROM 103 is set in the work area of the game RAM 104 . Subsequently, to the effect control board 120, a RAM clear notification command for notifying the clearing of the contents stored in the game RAM 104 is transmitted (S015), and the process proceeds to step S022. In step S022, as other power-on processing, for example, setting of game CPU 102, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed, and this processing ends.

[Setting Change Mode Processing] As shown in FIG. 41, in the setting change mode processing (S012), the game control microcomputer 101 first sets the effect control board 120 for notifying the transition to the setting change mode. A mode transition command is transmitted (S030). Then, it is determined whether setting value information is stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 (S031). If the set value information is stored (YES in S031), the set value was set before the power was cut off, so the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 based on the set value information (S032) (Fig. 26(B)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits serial data for displaying the setting value to the LED driver 350 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27). In this way, the setting changer can grasp the set value set before the power failure on the 7-segment display 300 immediately after performing the setting change mode transition operation.

In step S033, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 has been pressed in the setting change mode. If it is ON (YES in S033), new setting value information is stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 in order to advance the setting value by one (S034). When the set value is "6" and the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, set value information indicating that the set value is "1" is stored. Subsequently, based on the new set value information, the set values are displayed on the 7-segment display 300 (S035) (see FIGS. 26(C) and (D)). As a result, it is possible for the setting changer to understand that the set value has been moved up.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a setting value change command for notifying that the setting value has been changed to the effect control board 120 (S036), A setting value specifying command for notifying information (setting value information) is transmitted (S037), and the process proceeds to step S038. At step S038, it is determined whether or not the setting key cylinder switch 180a is OFF. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation operation has been performed. If it is not OFF (NO in S038), it is not yet time to end the setting change mode, so the process returns to step S033. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S038), the setting mode end command for notifying the end of the setting change mode is transmitted to the effect control board 120 (S039). Then, a setting value specifying command (fixed setting information) for notifying the fixed setting value information (setting value information) is transmitted to the effect control board 120 (S040). Furthermore, the set value change lamp lighting processing (to be described later) is performed (S041), the set values displayed on the 7-segment display 300 are turned off (S042), and the process proceeds to step S013 (see FIG. 40). In this way, as soon as the setting key cylinder switch 180a is turned off, the setting value is not visible on the 7-segment display 300, making it difficult for the surroundings to grasp the fixed setting value. Since the processing after step S013 has been described above, the description thereof is omitted.

Here, in this embodiment, there are a total of three timings for transmitting the set value designation command including the set value information to the effect control board 120 . The first timing is the timing of transmitting the setting value designation command by the process of step S010 when the power is turned on. The second timing is the timing of transmitting the setting value designation command by the process of step S037 when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode. The third timing is the timing of transmitting the setting value designation command by the process of step S040 when the setting value is determined upon termination of the setting change mode.

In this way, by limiting the timings at which the setting value designation command is transmitted to only three, it is possible to reduce the risk of the setting value information being illegally acquired outside as much as possible. That is, the first timing, the second timing, and the third timing described above are from the power-on to the start of the processing related to the game (game control processing from step S101 to step S106 shown in FIG. 46). This is a timing that does not occur after the game has started. In this way, the setting value designation command is not transmitted from the game control board 100 to the performance control board 120 during business hours (mainly during the game), and the setting value is illegally grasped by skimming the setting value designation command. It is possible to reduce the risk of being caught.

[Setting Change Lamp Lighting Processing] As shown in FIG. 42, in the setting change lamp lighting processing (S041), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 is turned on in the setting change mode. (S043). When the RAM clear switch 191 is turned on in the setting change mode (YES in S043), a set value change lighting lottery random number is acquired (S043). If the RAM clear switch 191 has not been turned on in the setting change mode (NO in S043), the process ends and the process proceeds to step S042 in FIG. The setting value change lighting lottery random number takes a value in the range of 0-99.

Thereafter, in the set value change lighting lottery process of step S045, the set value change lamp 200 is lit based on the set value change lighting lottery random number obtained in S044 and the set value change lamp lighting lottery table shown in FIG. lottery whether or not.

Subsequently, based on the result of the lottery in S045, it is determined whether or not the set value change lamp 200 should be turned on (S046). If the set value change lamp 200 is to be lit (YES in S046), the set value change lamp 200 (see FIG. 6) is lit (S047). Next, the set value change lamp lighting flag indicating that the set value change lamp 200 is lit is turned ON (S048), and the process proceeds to step S042 in FIG. If it is determined in step S046 that the setting value change lamp 200 is not to be turned on (NO in S046), the process is terminated and the process proceeds to step S042 in FIG.

[Setting value confirmation mode processing] As shown in FIG. 43, in the setting value confirmation mode processing (S019), the game control microcomputer 101 first displays the setting value on the 7-segment display 300 based on the setting value information ( S050). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the 7-segment display 300 started displaying the set value. If it has not elapsed (NO in S051), the process of step S051 is repeated, and the display of the set value on the 7-segment display 300 continues. On the other hand, if it has elapsed (YES in S051), the setting value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 is changed to a non-display mode (S052), and step S020 (see FIG. ). As described above, unlike the setting change mode process (S012), the setting value confirmation mode process (S019) does not change the setting value, and simply displays the current setting value on the 7-segment display 300. Only.

[Power Interruption Restoration Process] As shown in FIG. 44, in the power interruption restoration process (S020), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the power interruption flag is ON (S060). The power-off flag is a flag that indicates the occurrence of power-off, and is a flag that is turned on in power-off monitoring processing (see FIG. 53), which will be described later. If the power-off flag is not ON (NO in S060), there is a possibility that the power has not been cut off normally, so the process proceeds to step S065.

On the other hand, if the power interruption flag is ON (YES in S060), the checksum of the game RAM 104 is calculated (S061), and the checksum of the game RAM 104 stored (memorized) at the time of the power interruption ( (See step S161 in FIG. 53)) is determined (S062). If these checksum values do not match (NO in S062), it is determined that the contents stored in the game RAM 104 are abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S065. On the other hand, if the checksum values match (YES in S062), it is determined that the contents stored in the game RAM 104 are normal, and the process proceeds to step S063.

In step S063, setting management of the work area of the game RAM 104 at the time of power recovery is performed. In this setting process, the power recovery information is read from the game ROM 103 and set in the work area of the game RAM 104 . After that, the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the power-off flag (S064), and proceeds to the above-described step S022 (see FIG. 40). Since the processing after step S022 has been described above, the description thereof is omitted.

On the other hand, in step S065, the information stored in the game RAM 104 is cleared. At this time, the setting value information stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 and the information related to the base stored in the base information storage unit 108 (information on the total number of shot balls, information on the total number of winning balls, one Previous base information, second previous base information, third previous base information) are not cleared. However, when proceeding to step S065, there is a possibility that the power supply is not normally cut off, or there is a possibility that the checksum value does not match and the contents stored in the game RAM 104 are abnormal. . Therefore, instead of the process of step S065, the setting value information and the information related to the base may also be cleared. In this case, after clearing the setting value information, setting value information indicating, for example, "1" may be newly stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 as the setting value of the initial value. In addition, in the process of step S065, if the power-off flag set in the game RAM 104 is ON, the power-off flag is turned OFF.

After step S065, the work area of the game RAM 104 is initialized (S066). In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the game ROM 103 is set in the work area of the game RAM 104 . Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a RAM clear notification command for notifying the clearing of the storage content of the game RAM 104 to the effect control board 120 (S067), and the above-described step S022 (see FIG. 40). ).

[Error Mode Processing] As shown in FIG. 45, in the error mode processing (S021), the game control microcomputer 101 first displays "E" in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 (FIG. 30(A) ) is executed (S080). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits serial data for indicating the letter "E" to the LED driver 350 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27). As a result, the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 emits light in an error lighting manner so as to represent the letter "E". By showing the character "E" on the 7-segment display 300, it is possible for the employees of the game arcade to recognize the transition to the error mode.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits an error command for notifying the transition to the error mode to the effect control board 120 (S081). Thereafter, loop processing is performed without returning to the power-on processing (S001, see FIG. 39). In this way, when the error mode is entered, the error mode continues until the power is turned off. Therefore, the game cannot be started unless the setting value is set by shifting to the setting change mode when the power is turned on next time.

[Main Side Timer Interrupt Processing] The game control microcomputer 101 repeats the main side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 46 every short period of time, such as 4 msec. First, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the jackpot random number used for the jackpot lottery, the hit type random number for deciding the jackpot type, the reach random number for deciding whether or not to set the reach state in the effect symbol variation effect, and the variation pattern. A random number update process is performed to update the fluctuation pattern random number, the normal symbol random number (hit random number) used for the normal symbol lottery, etc. (S101). At least part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC. If all random numbers are hardware random numbers, there is no need to update the random numbers by software. Moreover, the random number generation circuit may be incorporated in the game control microcomputer 101 .

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 performs input processing (S102). In the input process (S102), various sensors (first starting hole sensor 11a, second starting hole sensor 12a, gate sensor 13a, big winning hole sensor 14a, general winning hole sensor 10a) mainly attached to the pachinko game machine PY1 , discharge port sensor 18a (see FIG. 6)) is read, and a prize ball command for dispensing prize balls corresponding to the type of the prize winning port is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. The set prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 170 .

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a starting opening sensor detection process (S103), a special action process (S104), and a normal action process (S105). In the starting opening sensor detection process (S103), if there is a winning detection by the first starting opening sensor 11a or the second starting opening sensor 12a, it is determined that the number of pending memories corresponding to the winning opening detected is less than four. Random numbers such as jackpot random numbers (jackpot random numbers, hit type random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers (see FIG. 15A)) are acquired as conditions. Also, if there is passage detection by the gate sensor 13a, normal pattern random numbers (see FIG. 15 (B)) are acquired on the condition that the number of normal pattern reservations is less than four. After that, a special operation process (S104), which will be described later, is performed.

In the normal operation process (S105), the normal symbol random number acquired in the starting sensor detection process (S103), the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 17 (B)) is used for determination, and the normal symbol variation pattern selection table (Refer to FIG. 17(C)) is used to select the normal symbol variation time according to the game state. Then, the display of the normal design (fluctuation display and stop display) for informing the determination result of the normal drawing lottery is performed. As a result of the determination of the normal symbol random number, if the normal winning symbol is won, an auxiliary game that opens the electric chew 12D according to a predetermined opening pattern (opening time and number of openings, see FIG. 19) according to the game state is performed. conduct.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 performs an output process of outputting the commands set in the above processes to the effect control board 120 and the like (S106). Then, a base calculation process (S107), a base display process (S108), and a power-off monitoring process (S109), which will be described later, are executed, and this process ends.

[Special Action Processing] The game control microcomputer 101 performs the special action processing (S104) following the starting opening sensor detection processing (S103) (see FIG. 46). As shown in FIG. 47, in the special operation process (S104), the processing relating to the special figure display 81 and the big winning device 14D is divided into four stages, and "special operation statuses 1, 2, 3, 4" are added to each stage. are assigned. Then, when the "special action status" is "1" (YES in S201), the game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S202), and the "special action status" is "2". In case (NO in S201, YES in S203), special symbol fluctuation processing (S204) is performed, and when "special operation status" is "3" (both NO in S201 and S203, YES in S205) , Special symbol determination processing (S206) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "4" (S201, S203, S205 are all NO), special electric accessary product processing (S207) is performed. Note that the special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process] In the special symbol standby process (S202), a random number such as a big hit random number acquired in the start sensor detection process (S103) is set to a big hit determination table based on the set value indicated by the set value information (Fig. 16 ( A) to (F)), hit type determination table (see FIG. 14), reach determination table (see FIG. 17 (A)), special figure variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 18). Then, the variable display of the special symbols for showing the result of the jackpot lottery is performed. When displaying the special symbols, a variation start command including information on the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbols is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . In the special operation process (S104), if there is no memory of a random number such as a jackpot random number, a customer waiting standby command for causing the performance control microcomputer 121 to execute a customer waiting performance is set.

[Special Symbol Fluctuation Process] In the special symbol fluctuation process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol fluctuation time (see FIG. 18) has elapsed. If the time has not elapsed, the processing ends immediately. As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is continued.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has passed, a fluctuation stop command is set and the special action status is set to "3". Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbols with a symbol (big win symbol or losing symbol) corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data, this process is finished.

[Special Symbol Confirmation Process] As shown in FIG. 48, in the special symbol confirmation process (S206), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop time (see FIG. 18) has elapsed (S301). If it has not passed (NO in S301), this process is terminated immediately. As a result, the stop display of the special symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the stop time has passed (YES in S301), a special symbol, a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol, will be definitely displayed. After that, a setting value change lamp extinguishing process (S302), which will be described later, is performed, and a game state management process is performed (S303). In the game state management process (S303), if the probability variation flag is ON, the value of the probability variation counter that counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state is decremented by 1, and the value of the probability variation counter becomes "0". ”, and if it is “0”, the probability variation flag is turned OFF.

Subsequently, if the time saving flag is ON, the value of the time saving counter that counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time saving state is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter is "0" or not. 0”, the time saving flag is turned OFF. Then, a game state designation command including information on the current game state (information on whether the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are ON or OFF), information on the value of the variable probability counter and the value of the time saving counter, etc. is stored in the game RAM 104 Set to output buffer.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S304). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S304), an opening pattern (see FIG. 14 for details) corresponding to the type of jackpot won is set (S305). At this time, the value of a round counter that counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot won. Note that the setting of the release pattern (the set of data corresponding to the release pattern) may be performed for each round.

After step S305, the game control microcomputer 101 performs game state reset processing (S306). In the game state reset process (S306), first, if the variable probability flag is ON, the variable probability flag is turned OFF, and if the time saving flag is ON, it is turned OFF. In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it is controlled to a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. After that, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (S307), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (S308). Then, the special action status is set to "4" (S309), and this processing ends.

Also, if the jackpot flag is not ON in step S304 (NO in S304), the jackpot game is not started, so the special action status is set to "1" (S310), and this processing is finished.

[Setting value change lamp extinguishing process] As shown in FIG. 49, in the setting value change lamp extinguishing process (S302), first, it is determined whether or not the setting value change lamp lighting flag is ON (S351). If the set value change lamp lighting flag is ON (YES in S351), 1 is added to the value of the variation display counter (S352), and it is determined whether or not the value of the variation display counter is 100 (S353). ). If the set value change lamp lighting flag is OFF (NO in S351), the process is finished as it is, and the process proceeds to S303 in FIG. Also, in step S353, when the value of the variation display counter is 100 (YES in S353), the value of the variation display counter is reset (S354). Also, if the value of the fluctuation display counter is not 100 (NO in S353), this process is finished as it is, and the process proceeds to S303 in FIG. In step S355, a set value change lamp turn-off lottery random number is acquired, and based on the set value change lamp turn-off lottery random number acquired in S355 and the set value change lamp turn-off lottery table shown in FIG. (S356).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not to turn off the set value change lamp 200 based on the lottery result of step S356 (S357). If the lit set value change lamp 200 is to be extinguished (YES in S357), the lit set value change lamp 200 is extinguished (S358), the set value change lamp lighting flag is turned off (S359), and this process is executed. and proceed to S304 in FIG. If the set value change lamp 200 that is lit is not to be turned off (NO in S357), the process is finished as it is, and the process proceeds to S303 in FIG.

If the setting value change lamp 200 is controlled by the production control microcomputer 121, or if the production control microcomputer 121 controls the suggestive production suggesting that the setting value has been changed, for example, the development designer may If the specification is changed in order to perform the effect of , there is a possibility that the set value change lamp 200 and the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value has been changed will be affected. However, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first form, the set value change lamp 200 is turned on or off under the control of the game control microcomputer 101 (see FIGS. 42 and 49). Even if there is a circumstance that the specification is changed in order to perform the effect of , it is not so affected because it involves the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player that the set value has been changed by means of the set value change lamp 200 controlled by the game control microcomputer 101, and to allow the player to grasp the change.

[Special electric accessory processing] In the special electric accessory processing (S207), first, as a result of judging the jackpot random number, if the jackpot is won, a predetermined opening pattern (opening time, opening A jackpot game (special game) is performed to open the big winning hole 14 according to the number of times (see FIG. 14). In addition, the game state after the end of the jackpot game (the value of the variable probability counter, the value of the time reduction counter) is set according to the type of the jackpot (see FIG. 14). In addition, in the special electric role product processing (S207), information on the current game state (information on whether the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are ON or OFF), information on the value of the probability variation counter and the value of the time saving counter, etc. The game state designating command including is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and this process is finished.

[Base Operation Processing] As shown in FIG. 50, in the base operation processing (S107), the game control microcomputer 101 first executes shot ball count processing (S110). In the shot ball number counting process (S110), the value of the shot ball number counter provided in the game RAM 104 is increased based on the detection signal from the outlet sensor 18a. However, in this embodiment, since the base in the normal game state is calculated, the value of the shot ball number counter is increased only in the normal game state. Next, it is determined whether or not the number of shot balls is a multiple of 10,000, that is, whether or not the value of the shot ball number counter is a multiple of 10,000 such as 10,000, 20,000, 30,000, 40,000, 50,000, and 60,000 (S111). ). If it is not a multiple of 10000 shots (NO in S111), proceed to step S113. On the other hand, if it is a multiple of 10,000 shots (YES in S111), a setting suggestion condition fulfillment command for notifying the effect control microcomputer 121 that the number of shot balls has become a multiple of 10,000 shots is set in the game RAM 104. (S112).

Subsequently, in step S113, a total award ball count process is executed. In the total winning ball counting process (S113), based on the detection signals from the first starting opening sensor 11a, the second starting opening sensor 12a, the big winning opening sensor 14a, and the general winning opening sensor 10a, The value of the counter for the total number of awarded balls is increased by a value corresponding to the number of awarded balls. However, in this embodiment, since the base in the normal game state is calculated, the value of the total number of prize balls counter is increased by the value corresponding to the number of prize balls only in the normal game state. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls for winning the first start opening 11 is "3", the number of prize balls for winning the second start opening 12 is "1", and the number of prize balls for winning the big prize opening is " 10", and the number of prize balls for winning in the general prize opening 10 is "5", but these number of prize balls can be changed as appropriate.

Subsequently, current base arithmetic processing is executed (S114). In the current base calculation process (S114), the current base (%) is calculated by dividing the value of the total winning ball counter by the value of the shot ball counter and multiplying by 100. Then, the calculated current base information (current base information) is stored in the base information storage unit 108 .

After step S114, it is determined whether or not the number of shot balls has reached 60,000, that is, whether or not the value of the shot ball number counter is 60,000 or more (S115). If the number of shots has not reached 60,000 (NO in S115), this process ends. On the other hand, if the number of shots has reached 60,000 (YES in S115), the base information stored in the base information storage unit 108 is shifted and stored (S116).

Specifically, if there is storage of the information of the third-preceding base (three-preceding base information), the third-preceding base information is cleared. Also, if there is stored information on the base two times before (base information two times before), the base information two times before is stored as base information three times before. Also, if there is stored information on the one-time previous base (one-time previous base information), the one-time previous base information is stored as two-time previous base information. Information on the current base (current base information) is stored as previous base information.

After step S116, the value of the shot ball number counter is cleared (S117), the value of the total winning ball number counter is cleared (S118), and this processing is finished. In this way, every time the number of shot balls reaches 60,000, the number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls are reset, and the current base calculation is performed.

[Base Display Processing] As shown in FIG. 51, in the base display processing (S108), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the initial display end flag is ON (S120). The initial display flag is a flag indicating that the initial display on the 7-segment display 300 has ended. If the initial display end flag is not ON (NO in S120), an initial display process for initial display on the 7-segment display 300 is executed (S121). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits serial data for lighting all the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 of the 7-segment display 300 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27) to the LED driver 350. . As shown in FIG. 26(F), the initial display is performed on the 7-segment display 300, thereby confirming that the 7-segment display 300 itself is free from failure, malfunction, or unauthorized modification. It is possible.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment) has passed since the initial display was started on the 7-segment display 300 (S122). If it has not passed (NO in S122), the initial display on the 7-segment display 300 is still continued, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S122), it is time to end the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, and the current base display flag is turned ON (S123). The current base display flag is a flag indicating that the current base is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 . After step S123, the initial display end flag is turned ON (S124), and this processing ends.

If the initial display flag is ON at step S120 (YES at S120), the process proceeds to step S125 to determine whether or not the current base display flag is ON (S125). If the current base display flag is ON (YES at S125), current base display processing for displaying the current base on the 7-segment display 300 is executed (S126). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 displays "bL." Serial data for displaying the current base in the area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is sent to the LED driver 350 . Thus, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the 7-segment display 300 enables the current base to be grasped, and it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko game machine PY1 is broken, defective, or illegally modified. It is possible.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the 7-segment display 300 started displaying the current base (S127). If it has not passed (NO in S127), the current base display on the 7-segment display 300 is continued, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S127), it is time to end the display of the current base on the 7-segment display 300, and the previous base display flag is turned ON (S128). The 1-preceding base display flag is a flag indicating that the 1-preceding base display timing has come. After step S128, the current base display flag is turned off (S129), and this process ends.

At step S125, if the current base display flag is not ON (NO at S125), the process proceeds to step S130 shown in FIG. 52 to determine whether or not the previous base display flag is ON. If the 1st previous base display flag is ON (YES in S130), then it is determined whether or not the 1st previous base information is stored in the base information storage unit 108 (S131). If there is memory (YES in S131), the 1st previous base display process for displaying the 1st previous base on the 7-segment display 300 is executed (S132). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 displays "b1." Serial data for displaying the previous base once in the area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is sent to the LED driver 350 . In this way, the 7-segment display 300 can grasp not only the current base but also the previous base as shown in FIG. It is possible to determine more accurately whether or not it has been applied.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S131 that the previous base information is not stored (NO in S131), the previous base non-display process is executed (S134). In this one-previous-base non-display process (S134), the game control microcomputer 101 transmits "b1 is displayed, and serial data for displaying “--” in the lighting mode in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350 . At this time, as shown in FIG. 32(C), the 7-segment display 300 cannot grasp the last base.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment) has passed since the 1st previous base display process (S132) or the 1st previous base non-display process (S134) was started (S135). ). If it has not passed (NO in S135), the present processing is finished in order to continue the one-time previous base display processing (S132) or the one-time previous base non-display processing (S134). On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S135), the second previous base display flag is turned ON (S136). The 2nd previous base display flag is a flag indicating that the display timing of the 2nd previous base is reached. After step S136, the previous base display flag is turned OFF (S137), and this process ends.

In step S130, if the 1st previous base display flag is not ON (NO in S130), the process proceeds to step S138 to determine whether the 2nd previous base display flag is ON. If the 2nd previous base display flag is ON (YES in S138), then it is determined whether or not the 2nd previous base information is stored in the base information storage unit 108 (S139). If there is a memory (YES in S139), the 2nd previous base display process for displaying the 2nd previous base on the 7-segment display 300 is executed (S140). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 displays "b2." The serial data for displaying the previous base twice in the area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is sent to the LED driver 350 . Thus, with the 7-segment display 300, it is possible to grasp not only the current base and the previous base, but also the two previous base as shown in FIG. Alternatively, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not unauthorized modifications have been made.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S139 that there is no storage of the base information two times before (NO in S139), the non-display processing of the base two times before is executed (S141). In this two-time-before base non-display processing (S141), the game control microcomputer 101 transmits "b2 is displayed, and serial data for displaying “--” in the lighting mode in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350 . At this time, as shown in FIG. 32(D), the 7-segment display 300 cannot grasp the base two times before.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment) has passed since the 2nd previous base display process (S140) or the 2nd previous base non-display process (S141) was started (S142). ). If it has not passed (NO in S142), this process is finished in order to continue the 2nd-previous base display process (S140) or the 2nd-previous base non-display process (S141). On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S142), the 3rd previous base display flag is turned ON (S143). The 3 times previous base display flag is a flag indicating that the display timing of the 3 times previous base has come. After step S143, the second previous base display flag is turned OFF (S144), and this process is finished.

At step S138, if the two times previous base display flag is not ON (NO at S138), the process proceeds to step S145 to determine whether or not the three times previous base display flag is ON. In step S145, it is virtually impossible to determine that the 3rd previous base display flag is not ON. That is, when the process proceeds to step S145, the three times previous base display flag is ON, so the process always proceeds to step S146. In step S146, it is determined whether or not the base information storage unit 108 stores three previous base information. If so (YES in S146), the 3rd previous base display process is executed to display the 3rd previous base on the 7-segment display 300 (S147). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 displays "b3." Serial data for displaying the previous base three times in the area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is sent to the LED driver 350 . Thus, with the 7-segment display 300, not only the current base, the previous base, and the second previous base, but also the third previous base can be grasped as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not there is a failure, defect, or unauthorized modification.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S146 that the 3rd previous base information is not stored (NO in S146), 3rd previous base non-display processing is executed (S148). In this 3 times before base non-display processing (S148), the game control microcomputer 101, from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27), in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 blinking "b3 is displayed, and serial data for displaying “--” in the lighting mode in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350 . At this time, as shown in FIG. 32(E), the 7-segment display 300 cannot grasp the 3rd previous base yet.

Next, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment) has passed since the display processing (S147) or the non-display processing (S148) was started (S149). ). If it has not passed (NO in S149), the present processing is terminated in order to continue the 3-time-preceding-based display processing (S147) or 3-time-preceding-based non-display processing (S148). On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S149), the current base display flag is turned ON (S150). As a result, the display of the current base is started on the 7-segment display 300 in the next base display process (S108). After step S150, the 3rd previous base display flag is turned OFF (S151), and this process is finished.

[Power-Off Monitoring Process] In the power-off monitoring process (S109), as shown in FIG. Otherwise (NO in S160), this processing ends. The power-off signal is a signal output from the power supply unit 190 when the voltage of the monitored power supply (for example, 24 V DC) is not detected for a predetermined period (for example, 25 ms). If a power-off signal is input (YES at S160), a checksum is calculated and stored in the game RAM 104 (S161), and a power-off flag is turned on (S162). Then, prohibition of access to the game RAM 104 is set (S163). This makes it impossible to write or read information to or from the game RAM 104 . Thereafter, loop processing is performed without returning to the main side timer interrupt processing (S005, see FIG. 39).

In parallel with the processing in the game control microcomputer 101 described above, the production control microcomputer 121 of the first form performs the processing shown in FIGS. The operation of the effect control microcomputer 121 will be described below.

[Sub-control main processing] The production control microcomputer 121 provided in the production control board 120 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 54 from the production ROM 123 when the power is turned on. Note that counters, timers, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 121 are provided in the effect RAM 124 .

As shown in FIG. 54, in the sub-control main process, it is determined whether or not the sub-side power-off flag (flag that is turned on when the power is off) is ON and the contents of the performance RAM 124 are normal (S1001). If the determination result is NO, that is, if the sub-side power cutoff flag is not ON, or if the contents of the effect RAM 124 are not normal even if the sub-side power cutoff flag is ON, then the effect RAM 124 Initialize (S1002) and proceed to step S1003.

On the other hand, if the determination result in step S1001 is YES, that is, if the sub-side power-off flag is turned ON due to the power failure, but the contents of the effect RAM 124 are maintained normally, then the RAM is cleared. It is determined whether or not a notification command has been received (S1011). If the RAM clear notification command is received (YES in S1011), the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 is cleared. Therefore, the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 is cleared (S1002), and the process proceeds to step S1003. On the other hand, if the RAM clear notification command has not been received (NO in S1011), the process proceeds to step S1003 without clearing the effect RAM 124 .

Here, in the process of step S1002, when the effect RAM 124 is cleared, the information of the setting value flag 125, which will be described later, is also cleared (erased). The set value flag 125 is used by the effect control microcomputer 121 to grasp the set value as information on the effect side (sub side). Therefore, when the power is turned on, if the effect control microcomputer 121 clears the effect RAM 124, the set value information is also cleared.

In step S1003, other initial settings are made. In other initial settings, for example, settings of the effect CPU 122, settings of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed. Also, if the sub-side power-off flag is ON, it is turned OFF.

In step S1004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S1005). In the random number seed update process (S1005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The random numbers for determining the effect include the random numbers for determining the effect pattern for determining the effect pattern, the random numbers for determining the variable effect pattern for determining the variable effect pattern, and the random numbers for determining the effect for determining the various effect effects. etc. The random number update method can be the same method as the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process (S1005) ends, the command transmission process is executed (S1006). In the command transmission process ( S1006 ), various commands stored in the output buffer in the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 are transmitted to the image control board 140 . The image control board 140 that has received the command executes various effects (variation effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect, etc.) using the image display device 50 according to the command. The effect control microcomputer 121 subsequently permits an interrupt (S1007). Thereafter, steps S1004 to S1007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S1008), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S1009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S1010) can be executed.

[Receiving interrupt processing] In the receiving interrupt processing (S1008), when the strobe signal (STB signal) turns ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the game control board 100 is input to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 121. This process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S1009, S1010). As shown in FIG. 55, in the reception interrupt process (S1008), various commands transmitted from the game control board 100 are stored in the reception buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S1101).

[1 ms timer interrupt processing] 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S1009) is executed each time an interrupt pulse of 1 msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. As shown in FIG. 56, in the 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S1009), first, input processing is performed (S1201). In the input processing (S1201), switch data (edge data and level data) is created based on detection signals from the input section detection sensor 40a (see FIG. 7) and the select button detection sensor 42a (see FIG. 7).

Subsequently, lamp data output processing is performed (S1202). In the lamp data output process (S1202), the set lamp data (data for controlling the emission of the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54) is sent to the sub-drive board so that the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 will emit light at a timing suitable for the production. 162. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 controls the light emission of the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54, so that the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 are controlled in a special first light emission mode (see FIGS. 26B and 26E), as will be described later. )), special second light emission mode (see FIGS. 26(C) and (D)), special third light emission mode (see FIG. 26(F)), special error light emission mode (see FIG. 30(B)) It is possible to emit light with

Next, drive control processing (S1203) is performed. In the drive control process (S1203), drive data is created and output in order to drive the board movable body 55k at a timing suitable for the performance. That is, according to the drive data, the board movable body 55k is driven in a predetermined operation mode. Then, watchdog timer processing (S1204) for resetting the watchdog timer is performed, and this processing ends.

[10 ms timer interrupt processing] 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S1010) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the effect control board 120. FIG. As shown in FIG. 57, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S1010), first, a received command analysis process, which will be described later, is performed (S1301). Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed to store the switch data created by the 1 ms timer interrupt process in the effect RAM 124 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S1302). Subsequently, switch processing for setting the display contents of the display screen 50a based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition processing (S1302) is performed (S1303).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates audio data (control data for outputting audio from the speaker 620) and executes audio control processing for outputting audio data to the image control board 140 (S1304). By this voice control processing (S1304), as will be described later, a voice saying "Settings can be changed" (see FIGS. 26(B) and (E)) and a voice saying "Setting values have been changed" (see FIG. 26(C) ) (D)), a voice saying “The set value has been determined”, and a special error sound (see FIG. 30B) can be output from the speaker 620 . After that, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes other processes such as creating lamp data and updating random numbers for determining various effects (S1305), and ends this process.

[Received command analysis process] As shown in FIG. 58, in the received command analysis process (S1301), first, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the game control board 100 (S1401), If it is received (YES in S1401), the fluctuation effect start processing to be described later is performed (S1402). Also, if the fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S1401), the process proceeds directly to S1403.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the game control board 100 (S1403), and if received (YES in S1403), the fluctuation production end processing is performed (S1404). . In the fluctuation production end processing (S1404), the fluctuation stop command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for production. Also, if the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S1403), the process proceeds directly to S1405.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the game control board 100 (S1405), and if it is received (YES in S1405), an opening effect selection process is performed (S1406). In the opening effect selection process (S1406), the opening command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (contents) of the opening effect to be executed during the opening of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an opening performance start command for starting the opening performance with the selected opening performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance. Also, if the opening command has not been received (NO in S1405), the process proceeds directly to S1405.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the round designation command is received from the game control board 100 (S1407). S1408). Also, if the round designation command has not been received (NO in S1407), the process proceeds directly to S1409.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the game control board 100 (S1409), and if received (YES in S1409), an ending effect selection process is performed (S1410). In the ending effect selection process (S1410), the ending command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (contents) of the ending effect to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an ending effect start command for starting the ending effect in the selected ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect. Also, if the ending command has not been received (NO in S1409), the process proceeds directly to S1411.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a set value designation command is received from the game control board 100 (S1411), and if received (YES in S1411), performs set value flag change processing ( S1412). In the set value flag change process (S1412), the set value flag 125 of the effect RAM 124 is set based on the set value information included in the set value designation command. For example, if the setting value designation command contains information of the setting value "1", the setting value flag 125 is set to "1", and if the setting value designation command contains information of the setting value "6". For example, the set value flag 125 is set to "6". Thereby, the production control microcomputer 121 can grasp the current set value. Also, if the setting value designation command has not been received (NO in S1411), the process proceeds directly to S1413.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the initialization of the effect RAM 124 (set value flag 125) in step S1002 (see FIG. 54) described above, based on the received set value designation command. It is possible to grasp the setting value in . As a result, as will be described later, it is possible to execute a symbol setting suggesting effect and a high setting suggesting effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the setting mode transition command is received from the game control board 100 (S1413). S1414). In the setting mode transition effect processing (S1414), a setting mode transition effect command for displaying the setting changing image SH shown in FIG. As a result, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 that has received the setting mode transition effect command displays the setting changing image SH on the display screen 50a. If the setting transition command has not been received (NO in S1413), the process proceeds directly to S1415.

Also, in the setting mode transition rendering process (S1414), voice data for outputting a voice saying "Settings can be changed" (see FIG. 26B) is set in a predetermined storage area of RAM 124 for rendering. As a result, the audio CPU 149 of the image control board 140 that has received the audio data causes the speaker 620 to output the audio "The setting can be changed." Also, in the setting mode transition effect processing (S1414), lamp data for causing the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special first light emission mode (see FIG. 26B) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. set to As a result, the sub-drive board 162 that has received the lamp data causes the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special first light emission mode. As described above, the display of the setting changing image SH, the voice saying "The setting can be changed", and the light emission in the special first light emission mode enable the person who changes the setting to enter the setting change mode and make any setting. It is possible to let the user know that the value can be changed.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a set value change command is received from the game control board 100 (S1415), and if received (YES in S1415), performs set value change effect processing ( S1416). In the set value change effect processing (S1416), a set value change effect command for displaying the set value change image YG shown in FIGS. 26(C) and 26(D) is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect. As a result, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140, which has received the setting value change effect command, displays the setting value change image YG superimposed (layered) on the setting changing image SH on the display screen 50a. As a result, it is possible to make the setting value change image YG easier to recognize than the setting changing image SH, and to preferentially show the state in which the setting value is changed. Also, if the set value change command has not been received (NO in S1415), the process proceeds directly to S1417.

Also, in the setting value change effect processing (S1416), the sound data for outputting the sound "The setting value has been changed" (see FIG. 26(C) or FIG. 26(D)) is stored in the effect RAM is set in the storage area of As a result, the audio CPU 149 of the image control board 140 that has received the audio data causes the speaker 620 to output the audio "The set value has been changed." Also, in the set value change effect processing (S1416), the lamp data for causing the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special second light emission mode (see FIG. 26(C) or FIG. 26(D)) is used for effect. It is set in a predetermined storage area of RAM 124 . As a result, the sub-drive board 162 that has received the lamp data causes the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special second light emission mode. As described above, the display of the setting value change image YG, the sound "The setting value has been changed", and the light emission in the special second light emission mode can be used not only by the person who changed the setting but also by the employees of the surrounding game parlors. It is also possible for the staff to grasp the circumstances in which the set values have been changed.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the setting mode end command is received from the game control board 100 (S1417). S1418). In the setting mode end effect processing (S1418), a setting value confirmation effect command for displaying the setting value confirmation image SK shown in FIG. As a result, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140, which has received the setting value confirmation effect command, changes the setting shown in FIG. The display is switched to the value confirmation image SK. Also, if the setting mode end command has not been received (NO in S1417), the process proceeds directly to step S1419 in FIG.

Also, in the setting mode end rendering process (S1418), voice data for outputting a voice saying "The set value has been finalized" (see FIG. 26F) is set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 124 for rendering. As a result, the audio CPU 149 of the image control board 140 that has received the audio data causes the speaker 620 to output the audio "The set value has been determined." Also, in the setting mode end effect processing (S1418), the lamp data for causing the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special third light emission mode (see FIG. 26(F)) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. set to As a result, the sub-drive board 162 that has received the lamp data causes the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special third light emission mode. As described above, the display of the setting value confirmation image SK, the voice saying "The setting value has been confirmed", and the light emission in the special third light emission mode enable not only the setting changer but also the employees of the surrounding amusement arcades to Also, it is possible to grasp the situation in which the set value is determined.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 59, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an error command is received from the game control board 100 (S1420), and if received (YES in S1420), an error mode notification Processing is performed (S1421). In the error mode notification process (S1421), an operation suggestion effect command for displaying the operation suggestion image SE shown in FIG. 30B is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 that has received the operation suggestion rendering command displays the operation suggestion image SE shown in FIG. 30(B) on the display screen 50a. If no error command has been received (NO in S1420), the process proceeds directly to S1422.

Also, in the error mode notification process (S1421), audio data for outputting a special error sound (see FIG. 30B) is set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 124 for effect. As a result, the audio CPU 149 of the image control board 140 that has received the audio data causes the speaker 620 to output a special error sound. Also, in the error mode notification process (S1421), lamp data for causing the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special error light emission mode (see FIG. 30(B)) is set in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. do. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 that has received the lamp data causes the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special error light emission mode. As described above, the display of the operation suggestion image SE, the special error sound, and the light emission in the special error light emission mode inform the employees of the amusement arcade that the error mode has been entered, that is, that the set values have been set. It is possible to make them understand that they are not.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a setting suggestion condition establishment command is received from the game control board 100 (S1422), and if received (YES in S1422), the setting suggestion condition establishment flag is turned ON. (S1423). The setting suggestion condition satisfaction flag is a flag indicating that the number of shot balls is a multiple of 10,000, such as 10,000, 20,000, 30,000, 40,000, 50,000, and 60,000. If the setting suggestion condition satisfaction command has not been received (NO in S1422), the process proceeds directly to step S1424.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs other processes (S1424) based on received commands other than the above commands (for example, processes for performing effects associated with variable display of normal symbols). Then, the received command analysis process (S1301) ends.

[Variation Production Start Processing] As shown in FIG. 62, in the variation production start processing (S1402), the production control microcomputer 121 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (S1501). The variation start command includes information on the variation pattern (see FIG. 18) and information on the special figure stop design data based on the determination of the big hit. Next, an effect symbol selection process, which will be described later, is executed (S1502), and subsequently, a variation effect pattern selection process, which will be described later, is executed (S1503).

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a notice effect selection process (S1504). As a result, the content of the notice effect such as a so-called step-up notice effect or a chance-up notice effect is determined. Next, drive data setting processing for setting drive data according to the selected variation effect pattern is executed (S1505).

After that, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the selected production pattern, the variable production pattern, and the variable production start command for starting the variable production with the advance notice production to the output buffer of the production RAM 124 (S1506), The production start process (S1402) is ended. When the variable effect start command set in step S1506 is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 reads out a predetermined effect image from the image ROM 142 and displays it on the image display device 50. A variable effect is performed on the screen 50a.

[Effect symbol selection process] The effect symbol selection process (S1502) is a process for determining the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that are finally stopped and displayed in the variable effect. As shown in FIG. 61, in the effect symbol selection process (S1502), the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not the information of the variation pattern (see FIG. 18) indicates a failure (S1601). If it indicates a loss (YES in S1601), subsequently, a loss effect symbol lottery table based on the set value flag 125 is used to determine a loss effect symbol EZ (S1602). The determined losing effect symbol EZ is the last stop-displayed effect symbol among the three effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 indicating the losing symbol mode. Following step S1602, two performance symbols EZ excluding the losing performance symbols EZ are determined by lottery using a performance symbol lottery table (not shown) based on the variation pattern, and this processing is finished.

As described above, for example, if the set value flag 125 indicates "6", the random number of the losing performance symbol is acquired, and the random number of the losing performance symbol is obtained using the losing performance symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 36(F). judge. In this case, since the sixth effect symbol EZf is likely to be determined as the losing effect symbol EZ, the execution frequency of the symbol setting suggesting effect as shown in FIG. 37(B) increases. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess that the set value is "6" and to make the player interested in the lost symbol mode of the effect symbol EZ.

On the other hand, in step S1601, if the variation pattern information does not indicate a loss (NO in S1601), it means that the jackpot has been won, and the process proceeds to step S1604. In this case, the three performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to be stop-displayed in the jackpot design mode (double eyes) are determined by lottery using a performance symbol lottery table (not shown) based on the fluctuation pattern (S1604). ), the process ends.

Fluctuation production pattern selection processing (S1503) is processing for determining the fluctuation production pattern which is the contents of the fluctuation production. If the variable production pattern is decided, the time of the variable production, the variable display mode of the production pattern, the presence or absence of the reach production, the content of the reach production, the presence or absence of the setting value suggestion production that suggests the setting value, the content of the setting value suggestion production, the button Presence/absence of operation promotion effect, presence/absence of jackpot confirmation effect, presence/absence of loss confirmation effect, presence/absence of SP battle reach, presence/absence of SW effect (effect button effect), content of SW effect, effect development structure, type of background of effect pattern, etc. The details of the contents of the variable production consisting of will be decided.

[Variation effect pattern selection process 2] As shown in FIG. 62, in the variation effect pattern selection process 2 (S1504), the effect control microcomputer 121 first detects that the information of the variation pattern (see FIG. 18) indicates SP reach loss. It is determined whether there is (S1701). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there are variation patterns P11, P14, P15, P41, P42, P43 (see FIG. 18). If it indicates that the SP reach is lost (YES in S1801), then it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion condition fulfillment flag is ON (S1802). If it is ON (YES in S1802), the setting suggestion condition fulfillment flag is turned OFF (S1803), and the process proceeds to step S1704. In short, the case of proceeding to step S1804 means that the SP reach is lost and the number of shot balls exceeds a multiple of 10,000.

In step S1804, it is determined whether the value of the set value flag is "4", "5" or "6". If it is "4" or "5" or "6" (YES in S1804), lottery is performed based on the variation pattern using a variation performance pattern table for high setting suggestive performance (not shown). As a result, an SP reach-losing variation effect pattern with a high setting suggestion effect is determined, and this processing is finished. In this way, when the SP reach-losing variation effect pattern with the high setting suggestive effect is determined, the battle effect shown in FIG. 38(A)→the battle defeat effect shown in FIG. 38(B)→the effect shown in FIG. After the stop display of the symbol EZ in the failing symbol mode, as shown in FIG. 38(D), a high setting suggestive effect showing the phoenix image FT is executed. As a result, the player who is discouraged by the loss of the SP reach can grasp the phoenix image FT as if he had acquired a high setting (the set value is "4", "5" or "6") by resurrection. It is possible to give a feeling of elation.

On the other hand, if the SP reach is not lost (NO in S1801), if the setting condition suggestion flag is not ON (NO in S1802), if the set value is not set high ("4" or "5" or "6") ( If NO in S1804), proceed to step S1806. In step S1806, based on the variation pattern, lottery is performed using a variable effect pattern table for no high setting suggestion effect (not shown). As a result, a variable effect pattern without a high setting suggestive effect is determined, and this processing is finished. For example, when the variation pattern P3 or the variation pattern P13 is selected and the variation effect pattern without the high setting suggestion effect is selected, the SP battle reach is executed through the normal reach.

13. Effect of the First Mode As described above in detail, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first mode, the setting change mode transition operation is performed, and immediately after the power is turned on, the setting change mode is transitioned as described above, and the In the setting change mode, for example, if you perform a setting change operation that allows you to change the setting value before the power is cut off to another setting value, and then perform the setting confirmation operation, the setting change mode ends and the setting is made at the same time. The value change lamp 200 may light up (see FIG. 33(A)). Then, when the set value change lamp 200 is turned on, if the number of times that the special symbols are varied and displayed reaches 100 times, the set value change lamp 200 that is being turned on may go out (Fig. 33 (B )reference). Thus, when the set value change lamp 200 is turned on, the set value is changed by making the player confirm that the set value change lamp 200 is turned on until the variable display of the special symbols is performed 100 times. It is possible to grasp what Therefore, the setting value change lamp 200 indicating that the setting value has been changed after the power is turned on can motivate the player to play the pachinko game machine from the beginning of the morning.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first form, when the power is turned on, in the setting change mode, for example, the setting value before the power is cut off can be changed to another setting value. Then, the setting change mode is terminated after the setting confirmation operation is performed, and the setting value change lamp 200 is turned on (see FIG. 33A). Since the set value change lamp 200 does not go out until the special symbols are displayed 100 times after the set value change lamp 200 is turned on, the set value change lamp 200 is turned on by the player. It is possible to make them understand that Thus, by confirming whether or not the set value change lamp 200 is lit, it is possible to motivate the pachinko game machine to play a game in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed 100 times. It becomes possible.

If the set value change lamp 200 is controlled by the performance control microcomputer 121, and the development designer changes the performance control by the performance control microcomputer 121, the set value change lamp 200 is not lit. may be controlled. However, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first form, since the set value change lamp 200 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 101, the development designer changes the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 121. Even if the setting value is changed, it is possible to suggest to the player that the set value has been changed, and the player can grasp the suggestion.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first mode, the setting value change lamp 200 lights up when the setting value is changed to a larger number than the setting value "1" and the setting confirmation operation is performed. The possibility is high (see FIG. 33(A)). This not only allows the player to determine that the set value has been changed by whether or not the set value change lamp 200 is lit, but also makes it possible for the set value to be higher than the set value "1" by lighting the set value change lamp 200. It is possible to infer that the number may have been set to a large setting. Therefore, not only whether or not the set value change lamp 200 lights up, but also the ease with which the set value change lamp 200 lights up can motivate the pachinko game machine to play first thing in the morning. .

Further, according to the pachinko machine PY1 of the first form, the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value "1" (normal probability state: about 1/ 300, high probability state: about 1/30) set value corresponding to the jackpot winning probability higher, set value “3”, set value “4”, set value “5”, or set value “6” Of these, it is more likely that the set value change lamp 200 will light up when the set value is changed and set (see FIG. 33(A)). As a result, not only is the player made to confirm whether or not the setting value change lamp 200 is lit, the setting value is changed, and the player is made aware that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, and the setting value change lamp is turned on. The lighting of 200 makes it possible for the player to guess that the set value has been changed to a value with a high jackpot winning probability. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game on the pachinko machine which starts playing from the beginning of the morning, depending on which setting value is selected from among the six kinds of setting values. Become.

14. Modifications Modifications will be described below. In the description of the modified example, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the above configuration, and the description thereof is omitted. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples may be combined as appropriate. Moreover, technical features in the above embodiments and modifications below can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification.

<Modified example of the first form>
In the first embodiment, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the set value change lamp 200 based on the set value change lamp lighting lottery table shown in FIG. 33(A) (see FIGS. 41 and 42). Also, based on the setting value change lamp turn-off lottery table shown in FIG. 33B, a lottery was conducted to determine whether or not to turn off the set value change lamp 200 that is on (see FIGS. 48 and 49). Here, in the set value change lamp lighting lottery table of the first form, the lighting ratio of the set value change lamp 200 differs according to the set set value (see FIG. 33A). On the other hand, in the setting value change lamp turn-off lottery table of the first form, the ratio of turning off the set value change lamp 200 during lighting was constant regardless of the set value (see FIG. 33(B)). . On the other hand, in the modified example of the first embodiment, the lighting ratio of the set value change lamp 200 is constant regardless of the set value, as in the set value change lamp lighting lottery table shown in FIG. 63(A). It may be (80%). Further, in the modification of the first embodiment, in the set value change lamp extinguishing lottery table shown in FIG. is also good (see FIG. 63(B)). In the modification of the first embodiment, only the set value change lamp lighting lottery table and the set value change lamp turn-off lottery table are changed, so the flow chart is the same as the flowchart described in the first embodiment.

In the modification of the first embodiment, the set value change lamp 200 setting is confirmed and the setting change mode ends, and at the same time, the obtained set value change lighting lottery random number and the set value change lamp shown in FIG. There is a case where a lottery is made to determine whether or not the set value change lamp 200 should be lit based on the lighting lottery table, and the set value change lamp 200 is lit (see FIG. 42). In the present embodiment, the lighting ratio of the setting value change lamp 200 is 80% regardless of which setting value is set among the six types of setting values described above (see FIG. 63(A)). .

Further, in this embodiment, the setting change operation is performed, the setting confirmation operation is performed, and the setting change mode ends. Variation display of patterns is started, special patterns are stopped and displayed after that, and when the number of times of fixed display of a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern in the special patterns reaches 100 times, a set value change extinction lottery random number is acquired. Then, a lottery as to whether or not to turn off the set value change lamp 200 is performed based on the acquired set value change turn off lottery random number and the set value change lamp turn off lottery table shown in FIG. (See FIG. 49). The set value change turn-off lottery random number takes a value in the range of 0-99. In the present embodiment, as described above, there are six types of set values, and according to the set value set among the six types of set values, the extinguishing ratio of the lit set value change lamp 200 is determined. are different (see FIG. 63(B)).

Specifically, when the set value is "1", the set value is changed if the obtained setting value change light-off lottery random number is from "0" to "9", and the setting confirmation operation is performed. With the end of the setting change mode, the rate at which the setting value change lamp 200 is extinguished is 10% (see FIG. 63(B)). Next, when the set value is "2", the set value is changed if the obtained set value change light-off lottery random number is from "0" to "19", and the set value is changed by the setting confirmation operation. The rate at which the setting value change lamp 200 is extinguished upon termination of the setting change mode is 20% (see FIG. 63(B)). Next, when the set value is "3", the set value is changed if the obtained set value change light-off lottery random number is from "0" to "29", and the set value is changed by the setting confirmation operation. The rate at which the setting value change lamp 200 is extinguished upon termination of the setting change mode is 30% (see FIG. 63(B)). Next, when the set value is "4", the set value is changed if the obtained set value change light-off lottery random number is from "0" to "39", and the set value is changed by the setting confirmation operation. The rate at which the setting value change lamp 200 is extinguished upon termination of the setting change mode is 40% (see FIG. 63(B)). Next, when the set value is "5", the set value is changed if the acquired set value change light-off lottery random number is from "0" to "49", and the set value is confirmed by the setting confirmation operation. The rate at which the setting value change lamp 200 is extinguished upon termination of the setting change mode is 50% (see FIG. 63(B)). Finally, when the set value is "6", the set value is changed if the acquired set value change light-off lottery random number is from "0" to "59", and the setting is confirmed. The rate at which the set value change lamp 200 is extinguished upon termination of the setting change mode is 60% (see FIG. 63(B)).

Therefore, in the modification of the first form, six types of setting values (setting value "1", setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", setting value "5", setting value "6" ), the higher the probability of winning the jackpot is, the higher the percentage of the set value change lamp 200 that is lit is extinguished (see FIG. 63(B)). As a result, not only is the set value changed by turning on the set value change lamp 200, but also by turning off the set value change lamp 200 that is currently lit, a set value with a high jackpot winning probability is set. It is possible to make the player think that there may be Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game not only in the morning but also continuously.

According to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the modified example of the first form, as shown in FIG. "1", set value "2", set value "3", set value "4", set value "5", set value "6") The ratio of lighting the value change lamp 200 is constant (80%). On the other hand, in the setting value change lamp turn-off lottery table shown in FIG. 63(B), the setting value change lamp 200 turn-off rate differs depending on the set value (see FIG. 63(B)). ). As a result, the setting value change lamp 200 lights up, thereby making it possible for the player to recognize that the setting value set for the player has been changed. Then, depending on the probability that the set value change lamp 200 being lit is extinguished, the variable display of the special symbols is started, and then the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and the number of times that the special symbols, the jackpot symbols or the losing symbols, are confirmed and displayed is 100. 6 types of set values (set value “1”, set value “2”, set value “3”, set value “4”, set value “5”, set value “6”) It is possible to guess which set value is set among them, and based on that guess, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine PY1 of the modified example of the first form, the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value "1" (normal probability state: about 1/300, high probability state: about 1/30), the set value corresponding to the jackpot winning probability higher than “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, the set value “5”, or the set value “ 6”, the set value change lamp 200 that is lit is more likely to go out (see FIG. 33A). As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not the setting value change lamp 200 is lit, and to grasp whether or not the setting value has been changed. Furthermore, the player can determine that the set value has been changed to a set value with a high probability of winning a jackpot, depending on whether or not the lit set value change lamp 200 turns off after the variable display of the special symbols reaches 100 times. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game on the pachinko machine which starts playing from the beginning of the morning, depending on which setting value is selected from among the six kinds of setting values. Become.

<Second form>
In the first form, it is possible to indicate to the player that the set value has been changed by the set value change lamp 200 controlled by the game control microcomputer 101 (see FIGS. 5, 41 and 42). ). On the other hand, the setting value change lamp 200 may not be included in the display devices 8 of the second form. As a result, the set value change lamp 200 controlled by the game control microcomputer 101 may be configured not to indicate to the player that the set value has been changed. However, in the second mode, instead of the setting value change lamp 200, the setting value is changed by the setting value change suggestion effect (suggestion notification) executed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. (See FIGS. 64A and 65A). Then, after the setting value change suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, when the variable effect is performed 100 times (predetermined number of times), that is, the variable display of the special symbols is started and the special symbols are stopped. When the displayed number of times reaches 100 (predetermined end condition), the execution of the set value change suggestion effect can be ended (see FIGS. 64(B) and 65(C)). Note that the image display device 50 corresponds to the "suggestion notification means".

A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68. FIG. In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment and the modified example of the first embodiment, the setting change mode transition operation is performed, and immediately after the power is turned on, the setting change mode is entered, and the setting change mode is entered. Then, when the RAM clear switch 191 is turned on in the setting change mode and the setting is confirmed, the setting change mode ends. Along with this, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the setting mode end command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 101 in step S039 shown in FIG. (see FIG. 64(A)).

Next, the setting value change suggestion effect will be described. In the second form, the RAM clear switch 191 is turned on in the setting change mode, the setting change operation is performed, and the setting change mode ends, and the effect control microcomputer 121 transmits at step S036 shown in FIG. When receiving the setting value change command sent and the setting mode end command sent in step S039 shown in FIG. 41, a setting value change suggestion effect start lottery random number is acquired. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 decides whether or not to start executing the setting value change suggesting effect based on the acquired set value change suggesting effect start lottery random number and the set value change suggesting effect start lottery table shown in FIG. A lottery is conducted, and if the lottery is won, a setting value change suggesting effect is executed (see FIG. 68). The setting value change suggestion effect start lottery random number takes a value in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, as described above, there are six types of setting values, and the ratio at which execution of the setting value change suggestion effect is started according to the set value among the six types of setting values. are different (see FIG. 64(A)).

When the set value is "1", the set value is changed if the acquired setting value change suggestion effect start lottery random number is from "0" to "9", and the setting is changed by the setting confirmation operation. With the end of the mode, the rate at which execution of the setting value change suggesting effect starts is 10% (see FIG. 64(A)). Next, when the set value is "2", if the obtained set value change suggestion effect start lottery random number is from "0" to "19", the set value is changed, and the setting confirmation operation is performed. With the end of the setting change mode by , the ratio of starting the execution of the setting value change suggestion effect is 20% (see FIG. 64(A)). Next, when the set value is "3", if the obtained set value change suggestion effect start lottery random number is from "0" to "29", the set value is changed, and the setting confirmation operation is performed. With the end of the setting change mode by , the ratio of starting execution of the setting value change suggestion effect is 30% (see FIG. 64(A)). Next, when the set value is "4", if the obtained set value change suggestion effect start lottery random number is from "0" to "39", the set value is changed, and the setting confirmation operation is performed. With the end of the setting change mode by , the ratio of starting execution of the setting value change suggestion effect is 40% (see FIG. 64(A)). Next, when the set value is "5", if the obtained set value change suggestion effect start lottery random number is from "0" to "49", the set value is changed, and the setting confirmation operation is performed. With the end of the setting change mode by , the ratio of starting execution of the setting value change suggestion effect is 50% (see FIG. 64(A)). Finally, when the set value is "6", if the acquired set value change suggestion effect start lottery random number is from "0" to "59", the set value is changed and the setting confirmation operation is performed. With the end of the setting change mode by , the ratio of starting execution of the setting value change suggestion effect is 60% (see FIG. 64(A)).

Therefore, in the second form, among the six types of set values (set value "1", set value "2", set value "3", set value "4", set value "5", set value "6") , the higher the probability of winning the jackpot, the higher the set value, the higher the rate at which the execution of the setting value change suggestion effect is started on the display screen 50a (see FIG. 64A). As a result, execution of the setting value change suggesting effect on the display screen 50a not only changes the setting value, but also makes it possible to speculate that a setting value with a high probability of winning a jackpot may be set. It is possible to make a person Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play a game on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 first thing in the morning.

Also, in this embodiment, execution of the set value change suggestive effect is started (see FIG. 64(A)), and at the same time that the number of times the variable effect is executed reaches 100 times, the set value change suggestive effect end lottery random number is acquired. do. Then, based on the obtained set value change suggestion effect end lottery random number and the set value change suggestion effect end lottery table shown in FIG. If the player wins the lottery, the execution of the setting value change suggesting effect is terminated (see FIG. 67). Incidentally, the setting value change suggestion effect end lottery random number takes a value in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, regardless of which set value is set from among the six types of set values described above, the rate of ending execution of the set value change suggestion effect is 80% (Fig. 64 (B )reference). Further, when the execution of the setting value change suggesting performance is not completed, when the variable performance is performed again 100 times, that is, when the number of times the variable display of the special symbols is started and the special symbols are stop-displayed reaches 100 times. , a lottery is made again as to whether or not execution of the setting value change suggesting effect is to be terminated. Then, it is possible to win at a rate of 80% in the lottery, and if the player wins, the execution of the setting value change suggesting effect is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the setting value change suggestion effect will be described. In the production example shown in FIG. 65, the execution of the set value change suggestive effect is started on the display screen 50a, and when the number of fluctuation effects reaches 100 times, the set value change suggestive effect being executed on the display screen 50a ends. It is assumed that The variable effect counter in the second form is a counter for counting the number of times the variable effect is performed after the execution of the set value change suggestion effect is started. The initial value of the variable effect counter is "0".

As shown in FIG. 65(A), on the display screen 50a, the left effect symbol EZ1 stops at the fourth effect symbol EZd, the middle effect symbol EZ2 stops at the fifth effect symbol EZe, and the right effect symbol EZ3 stops at the seventh effect symbol. It stops at the production pattern EZg. Note that when FIG. 65(A) is displayed on the display screen 50a, the value of the variable effect counter is 0, that is, the number of times the variable effect has been performed since execution of the setting value change suggestion effect was started. is 0. Further, as shown in FIG. 65A, a daytime background image Ha indicating daytime is displayed on the display screen 50a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who sees the daytime background image Ha recognize that the game is controlled in a low-probability short-time state (normal game state). Also, a setting value change suggestion effect is executed at the lower left of the display screen 50a. When the setting value change suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to suggest to the player that the setting value has been changed and that the changed setting value has been confirmed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 65(A). A set value change suggestion image SS is displayed. By displaying the setting value change suggestion image SS on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 65(A), the player can understand that the setting value has been changed and the changed setting value has been confirmed. becomes possible.

After that, when the value of the variable effect counter reaches 99 after 99 times of variable effects are performed, the effect shown in FIG. 65(B) is displayed on the display screen 50a. As shown in FIG. 65(B), the production pattern EZ (left production pattern EZ1, middle production pattern EZ2, right production pattern EZ3) is changed. A set value change suggestion image SS is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 50a.

Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, as shown in FIG. 65(C), the left effect symbol EZ1 is stopped at the fourth effect symbol EZd, and the middle effect symbol EZ2 is stopped at the fifth effect symbol EZe. The right performance symbol EZ3 is stopped at the seventh performance symbol EZg. Then, when the number of times the variable performance is performed after the set value change suggestion performance is executed reaches 100 times (the value of the variable performance counter is 100), that is, the number of times the variable display of the special symbol is performed is 100 times. , the execution of the setting value change suggestion effect is terminated as shown in FIG. 65(C). Along with this, as shown in FIG. 65(C), the set value change suggestion image SS is deleted from the lower left of the display screen 50a.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine (rotary drum type game machine, pachislot game machine) is known as a game machine in which one of a plurality of set values with different jackpot winning probabilities can be set. A conventional slot machine is capable of determining whether the power is simply turned on or the setting value is changed after the power is turned on, depending on whether or not reels are shaken in the first rotation. also existed. As a result, if it is possible to grasp that the setting value has been changed due to the shake of the reel in the first rotation, it is assumed that the setting value may have been changed to an advantageous setting value for the player. Attached.

On the other hand, some conventional pachinko game machines have a configuration in which a stage showing a high degree of expectation is drawn by lottery based on power-on, and the selected stage is displayed on the display screen of the image display device. With this configuration, by confirming the stage displayed on the display screen of the image display device, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game machine with a high probability from early in the morning. there were.

However, in a pachinko game machine in which one of a plurality of set values with different jackpot winning probabilities can be set, the power is simply turned on, or the set value is changed when the power is turned on. It is considered that there is no difference in appearance whether it is a case or not. Therefore, compared to the slot machine, there is little motivation to play games from the first thing in the morning after opening the store, presuming that the set values may have been changed to be more advantageous for the player. In addition, it is not motivated by the fact that it may be possible to play a game in a high probability state from the beginning of the morning after the amusement hall opens, but by guessing that the setting value may have been changed to an advantageous setting value for the player. It is thought that it is possible to motivate the player to play the game with.

Therefore, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the second form, the setting change mode transition operation is performed, and immediately after the power is turned on, the setting change mode is transitioned, and in the setting change mode, for example, the setting value before the power is cut off. At the same time that the setting change operation is performed to allow the setting value to be changed to another setting value, the setting change operation is performed, and the setting change mode ends, a setting value change suggestion effect may be executed on the display screen 50a ( See FIG. 64(A)). As a result, the player can determine whether or not the setting value has been changed before starting the game first thing in the morning, and play the game. Therefore, instead of suggesting to the player that it is in a high probability state, a new method of suggesting to the player that the power has been turned on and the setting value has been changed has been adopted. It is possible to increase the motivation to do.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the second form, when the set value change lamp 200 lights up and the number of times of performing the variable performance reaches 100 times, that is, the number of times of performing the variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times. , the setting value change suggesting effect executed at a rate of 80% ends (see FIG. 64(B)). As a result, the setting value change suggesting performance is executed on the display screen 50a, and the number of times the variable display of the special symbol is performed reaches 100 times, so that the information can be obtained only by the player who starts playing from the beginning of the morning. . Therefore, it is possible to perform a game while grasping whether the setting value change suggesting effect is being executed on the display screen 50a first thing in the morning, while guessing that the setting value may have been changed to a setting value with a high jackpot winning probability. , it is possible to play games. In this way, it becomes possible to contribute to the operation of the pachinko game machine after the game parlor opens.

For example, when a stage showing a high probability of expectation is drawn based on power-on, and the selected stage is displayed on the display screen of the image display device, the stage displayed on the display screen of the image display device is confirmed. By doing so, it was possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game in a high-probability state from the very first morning. As a result, the player can draw a lottery for special symbols in a high probability state from the first in the morning, and can win a jackpot in the lottery for special symbols relatively early. However, after that, when the game progresses and returns to the normal game state (low probability state and non-time saving state), it is unknown whether the player will continue to play the game with the pachinko game machine. Therefore, in a configuration in which high-probability expectations are notified based on power-on, it is possible to provide motivation in the early morning, but it is difficult to maintain motivation after returning to the normal game state. However, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, it is possible for the player to determine that the power has been turned on and that the setting values have been changed by the setting value change suggesting effect on the display screen 50a. This makes it possible to guess that a set value with a high probability of winning a jackpot may be set, thereby not only increasing the motivation to play the game from the beginning of the morning, but also regardless of the game state such as the high probability state or the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the pachinko game machine. As a result, in addition to the conventional sales method using a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine that notifies high-probability expectations based on power-on), the setting value can be changed, and the setting value can be changed. Since it is possible to create a new business method using a pachinko game machine that suggests a change, it is possible to diversify the business method using a pachinko game machine by amusement parlors.

[Received Command Analysis Processing] The variation effect end processing in step S1404 of the received command analysis processing (S1301) of the second form shown in FIG. It is a process different from the end process of the fluctuation effect. In addition, compared with the received command analysis processing (S1301) of the first type shown in FIG. 58, the second type received command analysis processing (S1301) shown in FIG. It is provided. The received command analysis process (S1301) of the first form and the received command analysis process (S1301) of the second form are the same except for the above two points.

[Variation effect end processing] The second type variation effect end processing (S1404) shown in Fig. 67 will be described. In the fluctuation production end processing (S1404), the production control microcomputer 121 of the second form analyzes the fluctuation stop command (S2001), and based on the analysis result, ends the fluctuation production for ending the fluctuation production being executed. The command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S2002), and the process proceeds to step S2003. When the variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 ends the variable effect. As a result, the performance symbols EZ (the left performance symbol EZ1, the middle performance symbol EZ2, and the right performance symbol EZ3) that have been variably displayed on the display screen 50a (for example, displayed so as to sway up and down) are definitely stopped and displayed. (It will be displayed without shaking).

Subsequently, in step S2003, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the setting value change suggestion effect flag is ON (S2003). Here, the setting value change suggesting effect flag is turned ON when execution of the set value change suggesting effect is started in the set value change suggesting effect start processing described later, and the set value change suggesting effect is executed. A flag that indicates that When the set value change suggestion effect flag is ON (YES in S2003), 1 is added to the value of the variable effect counter (S2004), and it is determined whether or not the value of the variable effect counter is 100 (S2005). . Also, in step S2003, if the set value change suggesting effect flag is OFF (NO in S2003), this process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to step S1405 in FIG.

When the value of the variable effect counter is 100 in step S2005 (YES in S2005), the value of the variable effect counter is reset (S2006), and the setting value change suggestion effect end lottery random number is obtained (S2007). Subsequently, in step S2008, the execution of the setting value change suggesting effect is terminated based on the set value change suggesting effect end lottery random number acquired in step S2007 and the set value change suggesting effect end table shown in FIG. 64(B). A lottery is made as to whether or not to do so (S2008).

After that, based on the lottery result in step S2008, it is determined whether or not to end the set value change suggesting effect (S2009), and if the set value change suggesting effect is to end (YES in S2009), the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a set value change suggestion effect end command for ending the set value change suggestion effect being executed in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S2010), turns off the set value change suggestion effect flag (S2011), This processing ends, and the process advances to step S1405 in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 121 sets a set value change suggestion effect end command for ending the set value change suggestion effect being executed in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S2011), thereby ending the set value change suggestion effect. The image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 that has received the command terminates the display of the setting value change suggestion image SS on the display screen 50a. As a result, it is possible for the player to understand that the execution of the setting value change suggesting effect has ended based on the fact that the variable effect has been performed 100 times.

[Set Value Change Suggestion Effect Start Processing] In the second form of set value change suggestion effect start processing shown in FIG. (S2101). If the setting value is changed (YES in S2101), the setting value change suggestion effect start lottery random number is acquired (S2102), and the information of the setting value currently set in the setting value flag 125 is acquired in step S2102. Based on the setting value change suggesting effect start lottery random number and the set value change suggesting effect start table shown in FIG. Then, based on the lottery result of step S2103, it is determined whether or not to start execution of the setting value change suggestion effect (S2104). Also, in step S2101, if the set value has not been changed, that is, if the set value change command has not been received (NO in S2101), this process ends and the process proceeds to step S1420 in FIG.

At step S2104, if the execution of the setting value change suggesting effect is to be started (YES in S2104), the effect control microcomputer 121 issues a set value change suggesting effect start command for starting the execution of the setting value change suggesting effect. is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S2105), the set value change suggesting effect flag is turned ON (S2106), the process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1420 in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 121 sets a set value change suggestion effect start command for starting execution of the set value change suggestion effect to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S2105), and the set value change suggestion effect start command , the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts displaying the set value change suggestion image SS on the display screen 50a. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to grasp that the setting value has been changed. Also, in step S2104, if execution of setting value change suggestion effect is not started (NO in S2104), this process is finished as it is, and the process proceeds to step S1420 in FIG.

In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the second mode, the winning value is stored in the game ROM 103 for each of the six types of set values, and the addition of processing related to the set values places a load on the game control microcomputer 101. ing. Therefore, as in the first form, if the setting value change lamp 200 or the like controlled by the game control microcomputer 101 indicates that the setting value has been changed, the load on the game control microcomputer 101 is increased. It will be. Therefore, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the second form, when the power is turned on and the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls the display screen 50a to change the setting value. Suggestion production is executed. As a result, the load on the game control microcomputer 101 can be suppressed, and the change of the set value can be suggested to the player by the set value change suggestion effect on the display screen 50a.

<Effect of the second form>
As explained in detail above, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the second form, as soon as the setting change mode transition operation is performed and the power is turned on, the setting change mode is transitioned as described above, and in the setting change mode For example, a setting change operation is performed so that the setting value before the power is cut off can be changed to another setting value, the setting is confirmed, and the setting change mode ends. Along with this, there is a case where a setting value change suggesting effect is executed on the display screen 50a (see FIG. 64(A)). When the setting value change suggesting effect is executed and the number of times the variable effect is performed from the start of execution of the set value change suggesting effect, that is, the number of times the variable display of the special symbol is performed reaches 100 times, the set value There is a case where the execution of the change suggestion effect ends (see FIG. 64(B)). As a result, the power is turned on, and in the setting change mode, for example, a setting change operation is performed so that the setting value before the power is cut off can be changed to another setting value, and the setting confirmation operation is performed. When the setting change mode ends, a setting value change suggestion effect is executed, and a setting value change suggestion image SS is displayed on the display screen 50a. Then, when the number of executions of the variable performance reaches 100 times, the set value change suggestion image SS displayed on the display screen 50a is confirmed until the execution of the set value change suggestion performance on the display screen 50a is completed, and the game is played. It is possible for the operator to recognize that the setting value has been changed. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the pachinko game machine from the first in the morning by the set value change suggesting performance suggesting that the set value is changed after the power is turned on.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the second form, when the power is turned on, in the setting change mode, for example, the setting value can be changed from the setting value before the power is cut off to another setting value. Then, the setting change mode is terminated after the setting confirmation operation is performed, and the setting value change suggestion effect may be executed on the display screen 50a (see FIG. 64A). Since the execution of the setting value change suggesting performance is not completed until the number of times of execution of the variable performance, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times after the performance of setting value change suggesting performance is executed, the set value is given to the player. It is possible to confirm the change suggestion effect. As a result, the player can confirm whether or not the setting value change suggesting effect is being executed on the display screen 50a, thereby playing a game in the pachinko game machine in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed 100 times. It is possible to increase motivation to

In the second embodiment, the setting change mode transition operation is performed, and immediately after the power is turned on, the setting change mode is transitioned to as described above, and in the setting change mode, for example, the setting value before the power is cut off is changed to another value. When the setting change operation is performed so that the setting value can be changed, and the setting confirmation operation is performed, the setting value change lamp 200 controlled by the game control microcomputer 101 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 121. , a setting value change suggestion effect may be executed on the display screen 50a. As a result, while suppressing the load on the game control microcomputer 101, it is possible to suggest to the player that the set value has been changed and allow the player to make the determination.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the second mode, when the set value is changed to a value larger than the set value "1" and the setting confirmation operation is performed, the set value is changed on the display screen 50a. There is a high possibility that the suggestion effect will be executed (see FIG. 64(A)). As a result, not only is the player discriminated that the set value has been changed, but also the set value that is advantageous to the player is set depending on whether or not the set value change suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 50a. It is possible to speculate that it may be. Therefore, not only whether or not the set value change lamp 200 lights up, but also the ease with which the set value change lamp 200 lights up can increase the motivation to play a game on the pachinko machine PY1 first thing in the morning. becomes.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the second form, for example, the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value "1" (normal probability state: about 1 /300, high probability state: about 1/30) set value corresponding to a higher jackpot winning probability, set value “3”, set value “4”, set value “5”, or set value “6 , there is a higher possibility that the setting value change suggesting effect will be executed on the display screen 50a (see FIG. 64A). ). As a result, not only is the player confirmed on the display screen 50a whether or not the setting value change suggestion effect is executed, and the player is made aware that the setting value has been changed and the setting confirmation operation has been performed. By executing the setting value change suggesting effect, the player can determine that there is a high possibility that the setting value has been changed to a value with a high jackpot winning probability. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation to play the pachinko game machine PY1 first thing in the morning depending on which set value is selected from among the six kinds of set values.

<Modified Example of Second Mode>
In the second form described above, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the set value change suggestion effect based on the set value change suggestion effect start table shown in FIG. 64(A) (see FIGS. 66 and 68). Further, based on the setting value change suggesting effect end table shown in FIG. 64(B), a lottery is conducted as to whether or not the execution of the set value change suggesting effect is terminated (see FIGS. 66 and 67). Here, in the setting value change suggesting effect start table of the second form, the ratio of starting execution of the set value change suggesting effect differs depending on the set value (see FIG. 64A). ). On the other hand, in the setting value change suggesting effect end table of the second form, the ratio of ending execution of the set value change suggesting effect was constant regardless of the set value (see FIG. 64(B)). . On the other hand, in the modification of the second form, as in the setting value change suggestion effect start table shown in FIG. It may be constant (80%). Further, in the modified example of the second embodiment, as in the set value change suggestion effect end table shown in FIG. can be different. It should be noted that in the modification example of the second form, only the setting value change suggestion effect start table and the set value change suggestion effect end table are changed, so the flowchart is the same as the flowchart explained in the second example (FIG. 66). , FIGS. 67 and 68).

A modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the modification of the second embodiment, the setting change mode transition operation is performed, and immediately after the power is turned on, the setting change mode is transitioned, and in the setting change mode, the RAM clear switch 191 is turned on. , the setting change mode ends when the setting confirmation operation is performed. Along with this, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives the setting mode end command transmitted in step S039 shown in FIG. (See FIGS. 66 and 68).

In the modification of the second form, the setting change mode is completed by performing the setting confirmation operation, and the effect control microcomputer 121 ends the setting mode transmitted in step S039 shown in FIG. When the command is received, similarly to the second form, a setting value change suggestion effect start lottery random number is acquired. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to start executing the set value change suggestion effect based on the set value change suggestion effect start lottery random number obtained and the set value change suggestion effect start lottery table shown in FIG. A lottery is conducted, and if the lottery is won, a setting value change suggesting effect is executed (see FIG. 68). The setting value change suggestion effect start lottery random number takes a value in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, as described above, regardless of which setting value is set among the six types of setting values, the ratio of starting execution of the setting value change suggestion effect is 80% (Fig. 69(A)).

In addition, in the modification example of the second form, similarly to the above-described second form, the setting value change suggesting effect is executed on the display screen 50a, and then, when the number of times the variable effect is executed reaches 100 times, the setting value is changed. Acquire a random number for end of suggestion presentation. Then, based on the information of the set value currently set in the set value flag 125, the obtained set value change suggestion effect end lottery random number, and the set value change suggestion effect end lottery table shown in FIG. A lottery is conducted as to whether or not execution of the value change suggesting performance should be ended, and if the lottery wins, the execution of the set value change suggesting performance is ended. Incidentally, the setting value change suggestion effect end lottery random number takes a value in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, the rate at which execution of the setting value change suggestion effect is completed differs according to the setting value that is set among the six types of setting values described above (see FIG. 69(B)). .

When the set value is "1", if the obtained set value change suggestion effect end lottery random number is "0" to "9", the ratio of completion of the set value change suggestion effect execution is 10. % (see FIG. 69(B)). Next, when the set value is "2", the execution of the setting value change suggestion effect is completed if the acquired setting value change suggestion effect end lottery random number is from "0" to "19". The ratio is 10% (see FIG. 69(B)). Next, when the set value is "3", the execution of the setting value change suggestion effect is completed if the acquired setting value change suggestion effect end lottery random number is from "0" to "29". The ratio is 30% (see FIG. 69(B)). Also, when the set value is "4", if the acquired set value change suggestion effect end lottery random number is from "0" to "39", the rate at which execution of the set value change suggestion effect ends is 40% (see FIG. 69(B)). Next, when the set value is "5" and the acquired setting value change suggestion effect end lottery random number is from "0" to "49", the execution of the set value change suggestion effect ends. The ratio is 50% (see FIG. 69(B)). Finally, when the set value is "6", the execution of the setting value change suggestion effect is completed if the obtained setting value change suggestion end lottery random number is from "0" to "59". The ratio is 60% (see FIG. 69(B)).

Therefore, in the modification of the second form, six types of setting values (setting value "1", setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", setting value "5", setting value "6" ), the higher the probability of winning the jackpot, the higher the set value that is set, the higher the rate at which the setting value change suggestion effect executed on the display screen 50a ends (FIG. 69 (B )reference). As a result, the jackpot winning probability increases depending not only on the fact that the set value is changed but also whether or not the setting value change suggesting effect is completed by executing the set value change suggesting effect on the display screen 50a. It is possible to make the player guess that a high setting value may be set. Therefore, it is possible not only to increase the motivation of the player to play the game on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 first thing in the morning, but also to increase the motivation to continue playing the game.

In the modified example of the second form, as shown in FIG. 69(A), in the set value change suggestion effect end lottery table, there are six types of set values (set value "1", set value "2", set value "3", set value "4", set value "5", set value "6"). are more likely to end As a result, by confirming the set value change suggesting effect that has been executed, not only is it possible to recognize that the set value has been changed, but also the number of the set value increases depending on how easily the set value change suggesting effect is completed. It is possible to infer that the setting value may be set. Therefore, depending on whether or not the set value change suggestion effect is executed and the ease of ending the set value change suggestion effect, the player is motivated to play the pachinko machine first thing in the morning, and the pachinko game that is playing. It is possible to motivate the child to continue using the machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine PY1 of the modification of the second embodiment, the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value "1" (normal probability state: about 1/300, high probability state: about 1/30), the set value corresponding to the jackpot winning probability higher than “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, the set value “5”, or the set value “ 6”, there is a high possibility that the setting value change suggesting effect being executed on the display screen 50a will end (see FIG. 69(A)). Thus, by making the player confirm whether or not the setting value change suggesting effect is being executed on the display screen 50a, the setting value is changed, and the player only needs to know that the setting confirmation operation has been performed. Instead, it is guessed which setting value is set among 6 kinds of setting values depending on whether or not the setting value change suggesting effect during execution ends when the variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times. It becomes possible to Therefore, depending on which setting value is selected from among the six types of setting values, the player is motivated to play a game with a pachinko gaming machine that starts playing from the beginning of the morning, and the game is played. It is possible to provide motivation as to whether or not to continue playing games with the pachinko game machine.

<Other Modifications>
In each of the above modes, there were six types of setting value "1", setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", setting value "5", and setting value "6" (Fig. 16 reference). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the number of setting values may be five or less, or may be seven or more.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the setting value change lamp 200 or the image display device 50 corresponds to the "suggestion notifying means", but the present invention is not limited to this. The speaker 620, the 7-segment display 300, the board lamp 54, the frame lamp 212, etc. may be used.

In each of the above embodiments, the setting value change lamp 200 or the image display device 50 corresponds to the "suggestion notification means", and the suggestion notification means can suggest to the player that the setting value has been changed. It is not limited to this. For example, the suggestion notification means may suggest a set value, or may suggest that the game state of the pachinko game machine is a high probability state when the power is turned on. Further, the suggestion notification means may suggest not only that the set value has been changed, but also the set value that has been set.

In each of the above modes, the "predetermined end condition" is that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times after the setting value change lamp 200 is turned on or the setting value change suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 50a. Equivalent, but not limited to. For example, the variable display of special symbols is started 100 times, the special symbol lottery is won first after the power is turned on, and the special symbols are first displayed after the power is turned on. Winning a jackpot in a lottery, and a jackpot game may be executed.

In the first form and the modification of the first form, the variable display counter is incremented by 1 when variable display of the special symbols is started, the special symbols are stopped, and the special symbols are fixedly displayed as the jackpot symbols or the losing symbols. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the variable display counter may be incremented by 1 when variable display of the special symbols is started and the special symbols are stopped and displayed. Also, the variable display counter may be incremented by one when the variable display of the special symbol is started.

In the above-described first form and the modified example of the above-described first form, the variation display counter is configured to add 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the initial value of the variation display counter may be "100" and the variation display counter may be decremented by one.

In the first form and the modified example of the first form, the number of times that the variable display of the special symbols is started, the special symbols are stopped, and the jackpot symbols or the losing symbols are confirmed and displayed is 100 times. Although it corresponds to "variation display of special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times", it is not limited to this. For example, the fact that the number of times the variable display of the special symbols is started and the special symbols are stop-displayed is 100 times may correspond to "the variable display of the special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times".

In each of the above embodiments, 100 times corresponds to the "predetermined number of times", but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be less than 100 times. Also, it may be 101 times or more.

In the modification example of the first form and the first form, the set value change lamp 200 controlled by the game control microcomputer 101 suggests that the set value has been changed, and is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 121 The display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is configured such that the setting value change suggestion effect is not executed. On the other hand, in the second form and the modified example of the second form, the display device 8 does not include the set value change lamp 200, but instead of the set value change lamp 200, it is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 121. It is configured to suggest that the setting value has been changed by the setting value change suggestion effect executed on the display screen 50 a of the image display device 50 . However, it is not limited to this. For example, the set value change lamp 200 is included in the display device 8, and the set value change lamp 200 controlled by the game control microcomputer 101 suggests that the set value has been changed, and the effect control microcomputer A set value change suggestion effect may be executed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 controlled by 121, and the set value change suggestion effect may suggest that the set value has been changed.

In the first embodiment and the modified example of the first embodiment, the lighting of the setting value change lamp 200 corresponds to the "suggestion notification", but it is not limited to this. For example, the display by the 7-segment indicator controlled by the game control microcomputer 101, the first special figure indicator 81a, the second special figure indicator 81b, the general figure indicator 82, etc. are set values in the setting change mode is changed, and if it suggests to the player whether or not the changed set value is fixed, it may correspond to the "suggestion notification".

In the above-described second form and the modified example of the above-described second form, the setting value change suggesting effect executed on the display screen 50a corresponds to the "suggestion notification", but is not limited to this. For example, an effect image displayed on the display screen 50a, a specific sound output from the speaker 620, light emission in a specific light emission mode from the frame lamp 212 or the board lamp 54, and the like are changed in the setting change mode. , may correspond to "suggestion notification" as long as it suggests to the player whether or not the changed set value has been determined.

In the second form and the modified example of the second form, the fluctuation effect counter receives the fluctuation stop command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 101, and is configured to be incremented by 1. However, the present invention is limited to this. never. For example, by receiving the variation start command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 101, the variation effect counter may be incremented by one.

In the second form and the modified example of the second form, the variable effect counter is incremented by 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the initial value of the variable effect counter may be "100" and the variable effect counter may be decremented by one.

In each of the above embodiments, the set value "1" corresponds to the "first set value" and the set value "6" corresponds to the "second set value", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting value "6" may correspond to the "first setting value", and the setting value "6" may correspond to the "second setting value". It can be changed as appropriate.

In the first embodiment, the setting value change lamp 200 is lit at a higher rate as the number of the setting value increases (see FIG. 33A), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting value change lamp 200 may be lit at a lower rate as the number of the setting value increases. That is, the smaller the number of the set value, the higher the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 lights up. Moreover, the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 shown in FIG. 33A is turned on is not limited, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the modified example of the first embodiment, the larger the number of the set value, the higher the percentage of the lit set value change lamp 200 that is extinguished (see FIG. 63(B)), but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the larger the number of the set value, the lower the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 that is lit may be extinguished. That is, the smaller the number of the set value, the higher the rate at which the lit set value change lamp 200 is extinguished. Further, the rate at which the lit set value change lamp 200 is extinguished is not limited to that shown in FIG. 63(B), and can be changed as appropriate.

In the second mode, the larger the number of the setting value, the higher the ratio of execution of the setting value change suggesting effect on the display screen 50a (see FIG. 64(A)), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the larger the number of the setting value, the lower the ratio of execution of the setting value change suggestion effect on the display screen 50a. That is, for example, the smaller the number of the setting value, the higher the ratio of execution of the setting value change suggestion effect on the display screen 50a. Also, the ratio at which the setting value change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 64A is executed is not limited, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the modified example of the second form, the larger the number of the set value, the higher the percentage of execution of the set value change suggestion effect being terminated (see FIG. 69(B)), but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the larger the number of the setting value, the lower the rate at which the execution of the setting value change suggestion effect is finished. That is, the smaller the number of the setting value, the higher the rate at which the execution of the setting value change suggestion effect is terminated. Further, the rate at which execution of the setting value change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 69B is ended is not limited, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the first form, the higher the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value, the higher the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 lights up (see FIG. 33A), but this is not the only option. For example, the higher the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value, the lower the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 lights up. That is, the lower the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value, the higher the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 lights up. Further, the lighting ratio of the setting value change lamp 200 shown in FIG. 33A is not limited, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the first embodiment, the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 that is lit is extinguished is 80% (see FIG. 33(B)), but the present invention is not limited to this. The rate at which the set value change lamp 200 that is lit is extinguished can be changed as appropriate.

In the modified example of the first form, the higher the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value, the higher the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 is extinguished (see FIG. 63(B)), but it is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the higher the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value, the lower the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 is extinguished. In other words, the lower the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value, the higher the rate at which the lit set value change lamp 200 is extinguished. Further, the ratio of turning off the set value change lamp 200 shown in FIG. 63(B) is not limited and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the modified example of the first embodiment, the rate at which the setting value change lamp 200 lights was 80% (see FIG. 63A), but the present invention is not limited to this. The rate at which the set value change lamp 200 lights can be changed as appropriate.

In the second form, the higher the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value, the higher the ratio of execution of the set value change suggestion effect on the display screen 50a (see FIG. 64(A)), but the present invention is limited to this. never. For example, the higher the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value, the lower the ratio of execution of the setting value change suggestion effect on the display screen 50a. That is, the lower the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value, the higher the ratio of execution of the set value change suggesting effect on the display screen 50a. Also, the ratio at which the setting value change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 64A is executed is not limited, and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the second form, the percentage of completion of execution of the set value change suggestion effect was 80% (see FIG. 64(B)), but the present invention is not limited to this. The rate at which execution of the setting value change suggestion effect is completed can be changed as appropriate.

In the modified example of the second form, the higher the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value, the higher the rate at which the execution of the set value change suggestion effect on the display screen 50a ends (see FIG. 69(B)). is not limited to For example, the higher the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value, the lower the rate at which execution of the set value change suggestion effect is completed. In other words, the lower the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value, the higher the percentage of execution of the set value change suggestion effect on the display screen 50a. Also, the rate at which execution of the setting value change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 69B is completed is not limited, and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the modified example of the second form, the ratio of starting execution of the setting value change suggestion effect was 80% (see FIG. 69A), but it is not limited to this. The rate at which execution of the set value change suggestion effect is started can be changed as appropriate.

In the setting value change lamp turn-off lottery table shown in FIG. 33B of the first embodiment, the rate at which the setting value change lamp 200 is turned off is constant regardless of the set value. is not limited to For example, the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 is extinguished may differ for each set set value. For example, the larger the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value or the number of set values, the higher or lower the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 is extinguished.

In the setting value change lamp lighting lottery table shown in FIG. 63(A) of the modified example of the first embodiment, the rate at which the setting value change lamp 200 lights is constant regardless of the set value. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 lights may differ for each set set value. For example, the larger the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value or the number of set values, the higher or lower the rate at which the set value change lamp 200 lights up.

In the setting value change suggesting effect end lottery table shown in FIG. 64(B) of the second embodiment, the ratio of completion of setting value change suggesting effect execution is constant regardless of the set value. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the rate at which the set value change suggesting effect ends may differ for each set set value. For example, the larger the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value or the larger the number of set values, the higher or lower the rate at which execution of the set value change suggestion effect is completed.

In the set value change suggesting effect start lottery table shown in FIG. 69(A) of the modified example of the second form, the rate at which the set value change suggesting effect starts to be executed is constant regardless of the set value. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the ratio at which execution of the set value change suggestion effect starts may differ for each set set value. For example, the larger the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value or the larger the number of set values, the higher or lower the rate at which execution of the set value change suggestion effect is started.

In each of the above embodiments, as shown in FIGS. 26(B), (C) and (D), the setting value may be directly displayed on the 7-segment display 300, while the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 and the speaker 620 was not used to indicate the set value directly. On the other hand, as in the modification shown in FIG. 70, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 and the speaker 620 may be used to directly indicate the setting values.

That is, when the setting change mode transition operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the setting value (for example, " 1”) is displayed, and on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, an initial setting value image YG1 indicating the setting value (for example, “1”) is displayed from above the setting changing image SH. This initial setting value image YG1 enables the setting changer and employees of the surrounding amusement arcades to grasp the setting values that were set before the power was turned on in a more comprehensible manner. It should be noted that in this modification, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a setting value designation command in step S033 shown in FIG. It suffices to execute display control of the image YG1.

After that, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the set value "2" is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 as shown in FIG. On the display screen 50a of 50, a changed setting value image YG2 indicating the setting value "2" is displayed from above the setting changing image SH. At this time, the speaker 620 outputs a voice saying "The set value has been changed to '2'." With the display of the changed setting value image YG2 and the sound from the speaker 620, it is possible for the setting changer and employees of the surrounding game arcades to grasp the changed setting value in a more comprehensible manner. It should be noted that in this modification, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a set value designation command in step S037 shown in FIG. Display control of the image YG2 and voice control of "The set value has been changed to '2'" may be executed.

Subsequently, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 70(D), a changed set value image YG3 indicating the set value "3" is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the speaker From 620, a voice saying "The set value has been changed to "3"" is output. It is the same as the case shown.

70(E) to FIG. 70(F), initial display is executed on the 7-segment display 300, and the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is displayed. , a setting value determination notification image SL showing characters of "The setting value has been determined to be '3'" is displayed. At this time, the speaker 620 outputs a voice saying "The set value is set to '3'". With the display of the setting value determination notification image SL and the sound from the speaker 620, it is possible for the setting changer and employees of the surrounding game arcades to grasp the determined setting values in a more comprehensible manner. In this modification, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits the setting mode end command in step S040 shown in FIG. 34, and the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the setting mode end command. It suffices to perform display control of the notification image SL and voice control saying "The set value is set to '3'".

As described above, in the modified example shown in FIG. 70, there is an advantage that it is easy to grasp the set values that were set before the power was turned on, the changed set values, and the fixed set values. On the other hand, there is a demerit that there is a high risk that the setting values will be grasped by anyone other than the employees of the game arcade. Note that the frame lamp 212, the board lamp 54, or other light-emitting means may be used to notify the set values that were set before the power was turned on, the changed set values, and the confirmed set values.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, as shown in FIG. Instead, the initial display was performed as shown in FIG. 26(F). On the other hand, as in the modification shown in FIG. 71, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, the setting value displayed in the lighting mode may be changed to a display mode other than the non-display mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 71(A), in the setting change mode, the setting value indicating, for example, "3" is displayed in the lighting mode in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. FIG. At this time, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, as shown in FIG. mode). As a result, it is possible to indicate to the setting changer in a more comprehensible manner which set value has been determined. Then, after the set value is displayed in a blinking manner for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), as shown in FIG. It may be executed. In the modified example shown in FIG. 71, the display mode of the set value shown in the setting change mode is the lighting mode, and the display mode of the set value shown when the setting confirmation operation is performed is the flashing mode. The display mode is an example, and can be changed as appropriate.

In each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 101 does not display the base when the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300, and does not display the set value when the base is displayed. However, as in the modification shown in FIG. 72, in the 7-segment display 300, for example, the base is displayed in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, and the set value is displayed in the fourth display area 340, for example. You can do it. In this case, the staff of the game hall can grasp both the set value and the base at the same time. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change in which display area of the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340 the setting value or the base is displayed.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, one 7-segment display 300 can display the set value and the base. On the other hand, as in the modification shown in FIG. 73, display means for displaying the set values and display means for displaying the base may be provided separately. For example, as shown in FIG. 73(A), setting values are displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the first display means (7-segment display) 300A, and as shown in FIG. 73(B), The base may be displayed in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the second display means (7-segment display) 300B. The display means for displaying the set value or the base is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be another segment display, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, a sub-liquid crystal display device, or the like. Display means for displaying set values and display means for displaying bases may be provided on a board other than the game control board 100 .

Further, in each of the above embodiments, as shown in FIG. 12, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 is supplied from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100, and then returned to the payout control board 170 and is not supplied again. . On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIG. 74, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 is supplied from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100, and then returned to the payout control board 170 to be supplied again. ing.

As shown in FIG. 74, in the electric circuit DK2 of this modification, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are connected by a harness HN5. A connector CN9 at one end of the harness HN5 is connected to the power supply unit 190, and a connector CN10 at the other end of the harness HN5 is connected to the payout control board 170. The harness HN5 is provided with wiring H11 for supplying power of DC 5V (normal power supply) from the power supply unit 190 and wiring H12 as a ground line.

In the payout control board 170, there is a power line A11 (specific power line) between the connector CN10 and the branch portion J3. The power line A11 is connected to the wiring H11 of the harness HN5 via the connector CN10. Also, in the payout control board 170, there is a power line A14 connected to the ground G. The power line A14 is connected to the wiring H12 of the harness HN5 via the connector CN10.

A filter NF1 similar to the filter NF1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the connector CN10 side of the power line A11. This filter NF1 can remove high-frequency noise from the normal power supplied through the power line A11. A capacitor CA1 similar to the capacitor CA1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the power line A11 on the branch portion J3 side of the filter NF1. This capacitor CA1 can prevent the DC5V voltage from dropping when the current fluctuation (load) in the normal power supply increases.

A capacitor CA2 similar to the capacitor CA2 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the branched portion J3 side of the power line A11 rather than the capacitor CA1. This capacitor CA2 can remove high-frequency noise from the normal power supply on the power line A11. There is a power line C11 (first specific power line) directed from the branch portion J3 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line C11 is connected to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the normal power supply is supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the wiring H11, the power line A11, and the power line C11. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 can normally operate based on the normal power supply.

The payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN6. A connector CN11 at one end of the harness HN6 is connected to the payout control board 170, and a connector CN12 at the other end of the harness HN6 is connected to the game control board 100. The harness HN6 includes a wiring H16 for supplying backup power from the game control board 100 to the payout control board 170, a wiring H14 for supplying backup power from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100, and a normal power supply. Wiring H15 for supplying from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100 is provided.

The payout control board 170 has a power line A12 (second specific power line) extending from the branch portion J3 to the wiring H14 of the harness HN6. 10) is connected in series. This resistor T1 can suppress the current flowing from the branch J3 to the resistor T1. A diode DO1 similar to the diode DO1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the power line A12 on the connector CN11 side of the resistor T1. This diode DO1 can prevent electric charges stored in a capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor), which will be described later, from flowing from the diode DO1 to the branched portion J3.

A capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) similar to the capacitor CA3 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the power line A12 on the connector CN11 side of the diode DO1. As a result, when the power is cut off, the backup power can be supplied by releasing the charge stored in the capacitor CA3. A capacitor CA4 similar to the capacitor CA4 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the power line A12 closer to the connector CN11 than the capacitor CA3. This capacitor CA4 can remove high-frequency noise from the backup power supplied through the power line A12.

Also, the power line A12 is connected to the wiring H14 via the connector CN11. The wiring H14 is connected to the power line D11 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN12. The power line D11 is connected to the Vb terminal of the microcomputer 101 for game control. Thereby, it is possible to supply the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 through the power line A12, the wiring H14 and the power line D11 at the time of power failure.

The payout control board 170 has a power line A13 extending from the branch portion J3 to the wiring H15 of the harness HN6. The power line A13 is connected to the wiring H15 via the connector CN11. The wiring H15 is connected to the power line D12 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN12. The power line D12 is connected to the Vc terminal of the microcomputer 101 for game control. As a result, the normal power supply can be supplied to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the wiring H11, the power line A11, the power line A13, the wiring H15 and the power line D12.

In the electric circuit DK2 of this modification, the power line D13 is branched from the branch portion J4 of the power line D11 of the game control board 100. FIG. The power line D13 is connected to the wiring H16 via the connector CN12. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 74, only when the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by the harness HN6, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 is supplied to the power line A12, the wiring H14 and the power line D11. It is possible to supply to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line D13, the wiring H16 and the power line B11. That is, the backup power supply is supplied from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100, and then supplied back from the game control board 100 to the payout control board 170, thereby being supplied to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. It has become so.

At the time of the in-circuit test, the in-circuit tester INC is connected to the payout control board 170 with the payout control microcomputer 171 removed from the payout control board 170, as shown in FIG. At this time, the in-circuit tester INC controls to supply power to the power lines A11 and A12. As a result, an in-circuit test is performed while electric charges are stored in the capacitor CA3. After the in-circuit inspection is completed, the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170. - 特許庁However, at this time, the payout control board 170 is not connected to the game control board 100 via the harness HN6 (see FIG. 74).

Therefore, the charge stored in the capacitor CA3 does not return from the payout control board 170 to the payout control board 170 via the game control board 100, and does not act on the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, it is possible to prevent malfunction of the payout control microcomputer 171 . When the entire pachinko game machine PY1 is assembled, at the stage of connecting the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 with the harness HN6, no electric charge remains in the capacitor CA3, so that the payout control microcomputer 171 malfunctions. never.

As explained in detail above, according to the electric circuit DK2 of this modification, as shown in FIG. 100 (another board) and can be supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 (specific control means) of the payout control board 170 . Therefore, backup power can be supplied to two control boards without providing a capacitor as a backup power supply means in the power supply section (power supply board, power supply unit), and a new supply relationship of backup power can be established. It is possible to

Further, according to the electric circuit DK2 of this modification, when the game control board 100 is removed from the payout control board 170, backup power is not supplied to the game control microcomputer 101 of the game control board 100. Furthermore, since the backup power supply is not supplied from the payout control board 170 back to the payout control board 170 via the game control board 100, the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 either. Therefore, it is possible to initialize the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 at the same time as removing the game control board 100 . In other words, although the game control board 100 is removed and the control related to the game is stopped (the information related to the game is cleared in the game RAM 104), the information related to the payout remains in the payout RAM 174. It is possible to prevent stored states. As a result, when the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 operate again with the normal power supply, it is possible to start the operations from the initialized state.

Further, according to the electric circuit DK2 of this modified example, as shown in FIG. 75, during the in-circuit inspection, power of DC 5V is supplied from the power lines A11 and A12, and electric charges are stored in the capacitor CA3. Therefore, the charge remains in the capacitor CA3 immediately after the in-circuit inspection. Therefore, after the in-circuit inspection, when the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170, the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are not connected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the charge remaining in the capacitor CA3 from acting on the payout control microcomputer 171, and it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 171 from malfunctioning. Since other effects are substantially the same as the effects of the first embodiment described above, description thereof will be omitted.

Moreover, in the above-described form, as shown in FIG. 12, it was impossible to switch between a conductive state in which backup power can be supplied from the capacitor CA3 to the payout control microcomputer 171 and a non-conductive state in which the backup power cannot be supplied. On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIG. 76, a switch SW1 is provided which can switch between a conductive state in which backup power can be supplied from the capacitor CA3 to the payout control microcomputer 171 and a non-conductive state in which the backup power cannot be supplied.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the electric circuit DK3 of this modification, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 (specific control board) are connected by a harness HN7. A connector CN13 at one end of the harness HN7 is connected to the power supply unit 190, and a connector CN14 at the other end of the harness HN7 is connected to the payout control board 170. The harness HN7 is provided with wiring H21 for supplying power of DC 5V (normal power supply) from the power supply unit 190 and wiring H22 as a ground line.

In the payout control board 170, there is a power line A21 between the connector CN14 and the branch portion J5. The power line A21 is connected to the wiring H21 of the harness HN7 via the connector CN14. Also, in the payout control board 170, there is a power line A13 connected to the ground G. The power line A13 is connected to the wiring H22 of the harness HN7 via the connector CN14.

A filter NF1 similar to the filter NF1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the connector CN14 side of the power line A21. A capacitor CA1 similar to the capacitor CA1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the power line A21 on the branch portion J5 side of the filter NF1. A capacitor CA2 similar to the capacitor CA2 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the branched portion J5 side of the power line A11 rather than the capacitor CA1. There is a power line C21 directed from the branch portion J5 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line C21 is connected to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the normal power supply is supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the wiring H21, the power line A21, and the power line C21. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 (specific control means) can normally operate based on the normal power supply. The power line A21 corresponds to the "specific power line", and the power line C21 corresponds to the "normal power line".

The payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN8. A connector CN15 at one end of the harness HN8 is connected to the payout control board 170, and a connector CN16 at the other end of the harness HN8 is connected to the game control board 100. The harness HN8 is provided with wiring H24 for supplying backup power from the game control board 100 to the payout control board 170, and wiring H25 for supplying normal power from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100. there is

The payout control board 170 has a power line A22 extending from the branch portion J5 to the wiring H24 of the harness HN8. A resistor T1 is connected in series. A diode DO1 similar to the diode DO1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the power line A22 closer to the connector CN15 than the resistor T1.

A capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) similar to the capacitor CA3 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the power line A22 closer to the connector CN15 than the diode DO1. As a result, when the power is cut off, the backup power can be supplied by releasing the charge stored in the capacitor CA3. A capacitor CA4 similar to the capacitor CA4 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the power line A22 closer to the connector CN15 than the capacitor CA3.

Further, the power line A22 has a branched portion J6 on the connector CN15 side of the capacitor CA4. A power line A23 extends from the branch portion J6 toward the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line A23 is connected to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. However, in the third embodiment, the power line A23 is provided with the switch SW1. The switch SW1 (switching means) switches between a conducting state (first state) in which backup power can be supplied to the power line A23 and a non-conducting state (second state) in which backup power cannot be supplied to the power line A23. It is.

The switch SW1 is a toggle switch capable of switching between a conducting state and a non-conducting state by manual operation. However, the switching means capable of switching between the conducting state and the non-conducting state of the power line A23 is not limited to the mechanical switch SW1 such as a toggle switch. For example, it may be electronically controlled using a semiconductor element such as a MOSFET, and can be changed as appropriate. The power line A22 and the power line A23 correspond to the "backup power line".

Thus, in the state where the pachinko game machine PY1 of this modification is set in the game hall, the switch SW1 is in a conductive state as shown in FIG. Therefore, when power is cut off, the charge stored in the capacitor CA3 is released, and the backup power supply can be supplied to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 through the power lines A22 and A23.

Also, the power line A22 is connected to the wiring H24 via the connector CN15. The wiring H24 is connected to the power line D21 of the game control board 100 (another control board) via the connector CN16. The power line D21 is connected to the Vb terminal of the microcomputer 101 for game control. As a result, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 can be supplied to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 (other control means) via the power line A22, the wiring H24 and the power line D21 at the time of power failure. be.

The payout control board 170 has a power line C22 extending from the branch portion J5 to the wiring H25 of the harness HN8. The power line C22 is connected to the wiring H25 via the connector CN15. The wiring H25 is connected to the power line D22 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN16. The power line D22 is connected to the Vc terminal of the microcomputer 101 for game control. As a result, the normal power supply can be supplied to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the wiring H21, the power line A21, the power line A22, the wiring H25, and the power line D22.

At the time of the in-circuit test, the in-circuit tester INC is connected to the payout control board 170 with the payout control microcomputer 171 removed from the payout control board 170, as shown in FIG. At this time, the in-circuit tester INC controls to supply power to the power lines A21 and A22. As a result, an in-circuit test is performed while electric charges are stored in the capacitor CA3. After the in-circuit inspection is completed, the switch SW1 is operated to bring the power line A23 into a non-conducting state (see FIG. 77) in which backup power cannot be supplied. Note that the switch SW1 may be placed in a non-conducting state before the in-circuit test is performed.

In this way, the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170 while the switch SW1 is kept in a non-conducting state. As a result, the charge stored in the capacitor CA3 does not act on the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line A23. As a result, it is possible to prevent malfunction of the payout control microcomputer 171 . Before assembling the pachinko game machine PY1 as a whole, the switch SW1 is operated so that the electric power line A23 is in a conductive state in which the backup power supply can be supplied. This is so that the backup power supply can be supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 at the time of power failure.

As described in detail above, according to the electric circuit DK3 of this modified example, the switch SW1 is brought into a non-conducting state in which the backup power cannot be supplied to the power line A23. This makes it impossible to supply backup power to the payout control microcomputer 171 from the capacitor CA3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the backup power supply from being unintentionally supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171, and it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 171 from malfunctioning.

Further, according to the electric circuit DK2 of this modification, as shown in FIG. 77, during the in-circuit inspection, the electric power of DC 5V is supplied from the electric power line A22, and electric charge is stored in the capacitor CA3. Therefore, the charge remains in the capacitor CA3 immediately after the in-circuit inspection. Therefore, after the in-circuit inspection, when the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170, the switch SW1 is kept in a non-conducting state in which the backup power cannot be supplied to the power line A23. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the charge remaining in the capacitor CA3 from acting on the payout control microcomputer 171, and it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 171 from malfunctioning. Since other effects are substantially the same as those of the present embodiment described above, description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in each of the above modes, as shown in FIG. 28A, when the setting key 184 (setting key cylinder 180) is in the rotating position, the "H" level switch signal is input to the game control microcomputer 101, As shown in FIG. 24B, when the setting key 184 (setting key cylinder 180) is in the process of being operated from the rotating position to the standby position, the switch signal is switched from the "H" level to the "L" level, As shown in FIG. 24(C), when the setting key 184 (setting key cylinder 180) is in the standby position, the "L" level switch signal is input to the game control microcomputer 101. FIG. However, as in the modification shown in FIG. 80, the relationship between the "H" level and the "L" level in the switch signal of the above form may be reversed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 78(A), when the setting key cylinder 180 is in the standby position, the "H" level switch signal is input to the game control microcomputer 101, and as shown in FIG. 78(B). When the setting key cylinder 180 is in the process of being operated from the standby position to the rotation position, the switch signal changes from the "H" level to the "L" level, and the setting key cylinder 180 is turned on as shown in FIG. 78(C). is in the rotating position, the game control microcomputer 101 may be input with a switch signal of "L" level.

However, in the modification shown in FIG. 78, as soon as the setting key cylinder 180 starts rotating from the standby position, the switch signal changes from "H" level to "L" level as shown in FIG. 78(B). Then, it will shift to the setting change mode. In this case, an unfamiliar operation or vibration of the setting changer may cause the setting change mode to be unintentionally easily shifted. Therefore, the above form (see FIG. 28) is preferable in that it can prevent unintentional transition to the setting change mode. Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 78, when ending the setting change mode, the setting value cannot be confirmed unless the setting key cylinder 180 is sufficiently rotated to the standby position as shown in FIG. 78(A). Can not. In this case, if the setting changer forgets to fully rotate to the standby position, the setting value will continue to be displayed on the 7-segment display 300, increasing the risk that the setting value will be grasped by the surroundings. . Therefore, in the above configuration (see FIGS. 26(E) and (F)), as soon as the setting key 184 (setting key cylinder 180) starts to rotate from the rotation position, the setting change mode ends and the 7-segment display is displayed. This is preferable in that the set values are not visible in the device 300 (becomes in a non-display mode).

Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the setting change mode is set, a setting changing image SH showing characters "setting changing" is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 as a mode suggestion to the setting change mode. was displayed, a voice saying "The setting can be changed" was output from the speaker 620, and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 were caused to emit light in a special first light emission mode (see FIG. 26(B)). However, mode suggestion to the setting change mode may be performed by means of effect (for example, a sub-liquid crystal display) other than the above-described effect means (image display device 50, speaker 620, frame lamp 212 and board lamp 54). In addition, it is also possible to use effects other than the above (for example, displaying an effect image or outputting a special effect sound), for example, outputting a special alarm sound from the speaker 620, or displaying a special character image on the display screen 50a. , it may be possible to indicate that the setting change mode has been entered (setting values can be changed).

Also, in each of the above forms, in the mode suggestion (display of the image SH during setting change, output of sound "setting can be changed", light emission in the special first light emission mode by the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54), the setting It only suggests that the value can be changed, and the selected set value itself cannot be grasped. However, it is also possible to adopt an effect mode in which the selected setting value can also be grasped.

Further, in each of the above modes, the image SH during setting change is continuously displayed from the time the setting change mode is entered to the end of the setting change mode, and the sound "The setting can be changed" is repeatedly output, and the frame lamp is displayed. 212 and board lamp 54 continued to emit light in the special first lighting mode. That is, the mode suggestion is continued only while the setting change mode is set. However, the execution period of the mode suggestion can be appropriately changed. For example, the mode suggestion may be executed only for a predetermined period after shifting to the setting change mode. and may be repeated periodically.

In each of the above embodiments, when the setting value selected in the setting change mode is changed, an upward arrow is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 as a change suggestion indicating that the setting value has been changed. A set value change image YG is displayed, a voice saying "The set value has been changed" is output from the speaker 620, and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 are caused to emit light in a special second light emission mode. However, the change suggestion that suggests that the set value has been changed is performed using a production means (for example, a sub-liquid crystal display device) other than the above-described production means (image display device 50, speaker 620, frame lamp 212, and board lamp 54). can be Moreover, it is also possible to use effects other than the above (for example, displaying an effect image or outputting a special sound effect). Alternatively, a background image or an item image corresponding to the setting value may be displayed on the display screen 50a to notify that the setting value has been changed.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the setting change mode is set, the setting value can be changed by pressing the RAM clear switch 191 . However, the setting value may be changed by operating means other than the RAM clear switch 191 (for example, a dedicated operation means for changing the setting value, or the input section 40k or the select button 42k). .

Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to the setting change mode by pressing the RAM clear switch 191 (transition operation unit). However, when the power is turned on, based on operating a transition operation unit other than the RAM clear switch 191 (for example, a dedicated switch provided on the game control board 100), it may be possible to shift to the setting change mode. In this case, it is preferable that the setting value can be changed by operating the transition operation means other than the RAM clear switch 191 when the setting change mode is set. This is because the number of parts increases if the transition operation section for shifting to the setting change mode and the operation means for setting the set value are provided separately.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game-related information stored in the game RAM 104 is erased without pressing the RAM clear switch 191 after the setting change mode is terminated. However, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 may not be erased unless the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed after the setting change mode ends. In this case, the employee of the game hall changes the setting value in the setting change mode, and does not press the RAM clear switch 191 after the setting change mode ends, thereby clearing the setting value without erasing the information related to the game. is changed.

In each of the above embodiments, the change suggestion suggesting that the setting value has been changed is given priority over the mode suggestion suggesting that the setting value can be changed. In other words, the setting value change image YG is displayed with priority over the setting change image SH, and the voice output of "The setting value has been changed" is output rather than the voice output of "The setting can be changed." , and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in the special second light emission mode with priority over light emission in the special first light emission mode. However, the relationship between the change suggestion and the mode suggestion can be changed as appropriate. For example, the change suggestion and the mode suggestion may be executed simultaneously (at the same timing). For example, the setting value change image YG and the setting changing image SH may be displayed in different display areas (a first display area and a second display area) of the display screen 50a. Further, for example, the speaker 620 (first sound output means) provided on the left side outputs a voice saying "The setting can be changed", while the speaker 620 (second sound output means) provided on the right side outputs "The setting value has been changed." It is also possible to output a voice saying "It was done". Alternatively, for example, the frame lamp 212 (first light emitting means) may emit light in a special first light emitting mode, while the board lamp 54 (second light emitting means) may emit light in a special second light emitting mode.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the setting value is changed, the entire setting value change image YG is superimposed on the setting changing image SH (see FIG. 26C). However, if the setting value change image YG (change suggesting image) is displayed more conspicuously (with priority) than the setting changing image SH (mode suggesting image), then the setting value changing image YG and the setting changing image YG are displayed. The images SH may be arranged in any way. For example, a part of the setting value change image YG may be superimposed on the setting changing image SH. Also, the setting value change image YG may be displayed larger than the setting changing image SH, or may be displayed in a conspicuous display area of the display screen 50a. Note that the setting value change image YG has been shown with an upward arrow (see FIG. 26C), but it can be changed as appropriate if it can suggest that the setting value has been changed. In addition, the display mode of the image SH during setting change shows the characters "setting being changed" (see FIG. 26B), but it can be changed as appropriate if the situation in which the setting value can be changed can be suggested. be.

Further, in each of the above modes, after the setting change mode is finished, as a suggestive effect image suggesting a set value, a phoenix image FT (see FIG. 38(D)) suggesting a high set value, or when showing a failing design mode, There was an effect pattern EZ that suggests a setting value by a number part. However, a suggestive effect image other than the above may be displayed. In other words, an effect other than the high setting suggesting effect and the symbol setting suggesting effect described above may be executed. For example, a suggestion effect image suggesting the setting value may be displayed during execution of the customer waiting effect indicating that the game is not in progress.

Also, in each of the above forms, the high setting suggestion effect is performed when the condition that the SP reach is lost and the condition that the number of balls fired after turning on the power reaches a multiple of 10000 (predetermined number of balls). executed. However, it may be executed when only one of the two conditions is satisfied, and the above conditions can be changed as appropriate. For example, when the winning is a big hit or when it is determined by a predetermined lottery, the high setting suggesting effect may be executed. Also, the high setting suggesting effect can be executed when the setting value is "4", "5" or "6", but it can be executed only when the setting value is "6", for example. It is possible to change the set value to be executed as appropriate. Also, the high setting suggestion effect is executed after the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed in the losing pattern mode (see FIGS. 38(C) and 38(D)), but the execution timing of the high setting suggestion effect (the display timing of the suggestion effect image) can be changed as appropriate. For example, the high setting suggestion effect may be executed before the battle defeat effect shown in FIG. 37(B) is executed. Alternatively, instead of the high setting suggestion effect, the low setting suggestion effect may be executed when the set value is "1", "2" or "3".

Further, in each of the above modes, the symbol setting suggestion effect is executed when the game is lost. However, the execution condition of the symbol setting suggestion effect is not limited to the case of losing, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the case of a big win or in the case of a predetermined lottery, the symbol setting suggesting effect may be executed. In addition, in the symbol setting suggesting effect, the set value is suggested by the numerical part of the effect symbol EZ indicating the failing symbol mode, but the set value may be suggested by means other than the effect symbol EZ. For example, setting values may be suggested by numerical portions attached to character images or item images. Also, the setting value may be suggested (a suggestive effect image is displayed) at a timing different from the timing at which the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 37(B)).

Further, in each of the above forms, the game control microcomputer 101 has the following three timings for transmitting the setting value designation command to the effect control microcomputer 121 . That is, the first timing at which the process of step S010 is performed when the power is turned on, the second timing at which the process of step S037 is performed when the setting value is changed, and when the setting value is confirmed upon termination of the setting change mode. There is a third timing for performing the processing of step S040. However, the game control microcomputer 101 may transmit the setting value designation command as a timing other than the above, for example, even after the setting change mode ends. In this case, for example, the setting value designation command may be transmitted at the start of the first fluctuation after power-on. Alternatively, the game control microcomputer 101 manages the execution of the set value suggestive effect that suggests the set value (display of the suggestive effect image), and the set value is specified only when the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the set value suggestive effect. A command may be sent.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, even when the game-related information stored in the game RAM 104 is erased based on the operation of pressing the RAM clear switch 191, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 is cleared. I tried not to delete it. However, when erasing the information related to the game, the setting value information may also be erased. In this case, for example, only when the setting change mode transition operation is performed, the game-related information and the setting value information may be erased immediately after the power is turned on, and then the setting change mode may be transitioned. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed in a state in which the setting value information is not stored and the control related to the game is executed without setting the setting value. be.

In each of the above embodiments, when the power is turned on, the set value can be displayed on the 7-segment display 300 based on the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 (see FIG. 26B). ). However, the setting values set in the previous game may be displayed on display means other than the 7-segment display 300 (for example, a dedicated display or the display screen 50a of the image display device 50).

Further, in each of the above embodiments, once the error mode was entered, the error mode continued until the power was turned off. Therefore, no game-related control was executed. However, even if the error mode is entered, the error mode may be terminated and the setting change mode may be entered based on a specific operation. In this case, by setting the setting value in the setting change mode, the control related to the game is executed thereafter. As a result, it is preferable that the game can be executed.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the error mode is entered, the 7-segment display 300 emits light in an error lighting mode so as to indicate the letter "E" as an indication of an error. However, the light emission mode can be changed as appropriate as long as it can suggest that the mode has shifted to the error mode. You may make it light-emit in the light emission mode which shows.

Further, in each of the above modes, when the mode is shifted to the error mode, an error notification indicating that the error mode is set is displayed on the display screen 50a with the message "The setting value is not set. Please perform the operation to shift to the setting change mode." An operation suggesting image SE indicating characters is displayed, a special error sound is output from the speaker 620, and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special error light emission mode. However, the error notification may be performed using a rendering means (for example, a sub-liquid crystal display device) other than the rendering means (the image display device 50, the speaker 620, the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54) described above. Also, a mode of presentation other than the above (for example, displaying a red image in the display area of the display screen 50a) may be used.

In each of the above modes, when the power is turned on, the setting key 184 (setting key cylinder) 180 is turned to the rotational position, but the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed, the set value confirmation mode is entered. . However, it is also possible to shift to the set value confirmation mode based on an operation other than the above. For example, it may be possible to shift to the set value confirmation mode during the execution of control related to a game, other than when the power is turned on. Specifically, in a customer waiting state (a state in which the special symbols are not variably displayed and a jackpot game is not being executed), based on opening the gaming machine frame 2, it is possible to shift to the set value confirmation mode. You can do it.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game-related information stored in the game RAM 104 is erased without pressing the RAM clear switch 191 after the setting change mode is terminated. However, after the setting change mode is finished, it is suggested that the information related to the game is erased based on the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 191 on a predetermined effect means (for example, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50). Also good. At this time, only when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the information related to the game may be erased. In this case, after the setting change mode ends, the employee of the game hall can arbitrarily choose whether or not to erase the information related to the game.

Further, in each of the above modes, as shown in FIG. 27, during normal operation (when the setting key cylinder 180 is in the standby position), the resistance T2 is made to function as a pull-down resistance, and the game control microcomputer 101 is set to the "L" level. A switch signal (second signal) is input. Then, when it is in the setting change mode, a switch signal (first signal) of "H" level is input to the game control microcomputer 101. - 特許庁However, when a predetermined resistance is functioned as a pull-up resistance at normal times, and a "H" level switch signal (first signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 101, and in the setting change mode, the game control An “L” level switch signal (second signal) may be input to the microcomputer 101 . However, even in this case, the setting change mode cannot be entered unless the setting key cylinder 180 is sufficiently rotated to the rotational position, and the setting change mode should be terminated as soon as the setting key cylinder 180 starts rotating from the rotational position. .

Further, in each of the embodiments described above, the setting key cylinder 180 that can be rotated is used as a transition operation means capable of shifting to the setting change mode and confirming the setting value. However, it is also possible to use other transition operation means such as direct-acting operation means, switch-type operation means, etc., so that the transition to the setting change mode and the determination of the set value can be performed. . Further, an operation means that enables transition to the setting change mode and an operation means that enables determination of the setting value may be provided separately.

In each of the above embodiments, as soon as the setting key 1184 (setting key cylinder 180) starts to rotate from the rotating position toward the standby position, the setting key cylinder switch 180a is switched from ON to OFF (FIG. 28(A)). (B)), the setting change mode was terminated. However, the setting change mode may end at another timing. For example, when the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated to an intermediate position between the rotation position and the standby position, the setting key cylinder switch 180a may be switched from ON to OFF. Further, the setting key cylinder switch 180a may not be switched from ON to OFF unless the setting key cylinder 180 is completely rotated to the standby position.

Further, in each of the above modes, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, as shown in FIG. A sound was output, and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 were caused to emit light in a special third light emission mode. However, it may be notified (suggested) that the set value has been correctly determined by another presentation mode. For example, by outputting a special sound from the speaker 620 or displaying a special effect image on the display screen 50a, it may be notified that the set value has been correctly determined.

In each of the above embodiments, after shifting to the setting change mode, the 7-segment display 300 sequentially displays the setting value, the initial display, and the base. However, the order of these displays can be changed as appropriate. For example, the initial display may be started first, then the set values may be displayed with the start of the setting change mode, and the base may be displayed when the setting change mode ends. In the above embodiment, as an initial display, all the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 of the 7-segment display 300 are lit, but other lighting modes (lighting modes) may be used, and can be changed as appropriate. .

In each of the above embodiments, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is to turn the setting key cylinder 180 to the rotating position, press the RAM clear switch 191, and turn on the power switch 195. rice field. However, the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode can be changed as appropriate. For example, the game machine frame 2 is open (the inner frame 21 is open to the outer frame, or the front door 23 is open to the inner frame 21) and the customer waiting state (the special symbol changes (not displayed and the jackpot game is not being executed). It should be noted that during the game (during the variable display of the special symbols or during the execution of the jackpot game), it may be possible to change the setting value by shifting to the setting change mode.

In each of the above embodiments, the setting change mode can be terminated by rotating the setting key cylinder 180 from the rotating position toward the standby position. However, the setting change mode may be terminated using an operation means other than the setting key cylinder 180. FIG.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the 7-segment display 300 displays the base in the normal game state. However, the base may be displayed in other game states. That is, the 7-segment display 300 may display the base in the jackpot game state, the base in the high probability state and time saving state, the base in the normal probability state and time saving state, and the like. Also, the base from the time the power is turned on to the current time (the base that is not classified according to the game state) may be displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the number of shot balls is counted based on detection by the outlet sensor 18a. However, the method for detecting the number of shot balls can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of shot balls is counted based on the detection by the first starting hole sensor 11a, the detection by the second starting hole sensor 12a, the detection by the general winning hole sensor 10a, and the detection by the big winning hole sensor 14a. You can do it.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the base can be displayed on the 7-segment display 300 . However, the 7-segment display device 300 may display information related to the performance of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 other than the base. For example, as information relating to the performance of the pachinko machine PY1, it is possible to display a payout ball (total number of awarded balls-number of shot balls) or a payout ratio. The output rate is the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained based on the operation of the character to the total number of prize balls obtained from the time when the power is turned on to the present time. The output rate includes the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. Of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls (role number of prize balls). The continuous role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive role prize balls) obtained based on the continuous operation of the special electric role to the total number of prize balls. In other words, the continuous accessory ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained only based on the execution of the jackpot game to the total number of prize balls.

In each of the above embodiments, as shown in FIG. 12, the payout control board 170 is provided with a capacitor CA3 capable of supplying backup power. On the other hand, you may provide the capacitor|condenser which can supply a backup power supply to the game control board 100. FIG. Also in the modification shown in FIG. 74, the game control board 100 may be provided with a capacitor capable of supplying backup power. Also in the modification shown in FIG. 74, the game control board 100 may be provided with a capacitor capable of supplying backup power. In these cases, the relationship between the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 explained in FIGS. is.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, when normal power is not supplied from the power supply unit 190 to the payout control microcomputer 171, the capacitor CA3 of the payout control board 170 is backed up to both the payout control microcomputer 171 and the game control microcomputer 101. configured to supply power. However, the capacitor CA3 of the payout control board 170 may be configured to supply backup power to either the payout control microcomputer 171 or the game control microcomputer 101 .

In each of the above embodiments, the capacitor CA3 as backup power supply means was an electric double layer capacitor. However, the backup power supply means may be a capacitor (for example, an electrolytic capacitor) having a capacitance smaller than that of the electric double layer capacitor. Also, the backup power supply means may be, for example, a battery other than a capacitor, and can be changed as appropriate. However, considering the possibility of fire due to heat generation, a capacitor is preferable to a battery for safety reasons.

In each of the above embodiments, the power supply unit capable of supplying power based on an externally supplied power source (24 VAC power) is configured as a power supply unit 190 (module) capable of mounting surface-mounted components. However, the power supply section may be configured as a power supply board on which surface mount components cannot be mounted. The power supply unit 190 and the power board may integrally incorporate a launch control circuit for controlling the launch of game balls (game media).

In each of the above embodiments, the normal power supply supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 and the game control microcomputer 101 was DC5V (specific voltage) power. However, the power may be based on other voltages. The backup power supply supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 and the game control microcomputer 101 was DC5V power. However, the power may be based on other voltages.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the payout control board 170 or the game control board 100 is provided with a capacitor CA3 as a backup power supply means. However, in addition to the payout control board 170 or the game control board 100, a control board (main board) that affects (may affect) the result of the game, a capacitor CA3 may be provided as a backup power supply means. That is, the performance control board 120, the image control board 140, and the sub-drive board 162 may be provided with the capacitor CA3 as backup power supply means. Further, in this case, the objects to which backup power is supplied may be the effect control microcomputer 121, the image CPU 141, the image RAM 143, and the like.

In each of the above embodiments, the power supply unit 190 supplied DC5V power (normal power supply) to the game control board 100, which is the board-side board, via the payout control board 170, which is the frame-side board. However, the relationship between the frame-side board and the board-side board is not limited to the relationship between the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the power supply unit 190 supplies DC 5V power to the effect control board 120, which is the board-side board, via the firing control board (the board on which the firing control circuit 175 is mounted), which is the frame-side board. good Also, the power supply unit 190 is not limited to DC 5V power, and may supply, for example, DC 12V power, DC 18V power, DC 24V power, and DC 37V power to the board side substrate via the frame side substrate. Note that the frame-side substrate and the board-side substrate may be relay substrates on which no integrated circuit (IC) is mounted.

In each of the above modes, the model name sticker may have a jackpot winning probability written thereon. In this case, it is preferable that the jackpot winning probability for each set value is described. Such a model name sticker may be provided adjacent to the 7-segment display 300 as in the above embodiment. With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately check the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 when changing the setting. That is, it is possible to change the settings while confirming the probability of winning the jackpot for each set value. In addition to the model name sticker, a model information sticker on which the jackpot winning probability is described may be attached to the game control board case 100A (lid case 410). The model information sticker on which the jackpot winning probability is described is called a winning probability sticker. Also, the type of model information sticker attached to the game control board case 100A can be changed as appropriate.

In each of the above embodiments, the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180 are provided on the same board (on the game control board 100), but both parts may be provided on different boards. In the above embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is not provided on the same substrate as the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180 (provided on the power supply unit 190), but it is provided on the same substrate. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which Further, in the above embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is used as an operation unit for changing the settings, but an operation unit for changing the settings may be provided separately from the RAM clear switch 191 .

In each of the above embodiments, the peripheral wall portion 413 surrounding the setting key cylinder 180 is a rectangular peripheral wall that matches the shape of the board connection side portion 188 of the setting key cylinder 180. It can be appropriately changed according to the shape and size of the key cylinder.

In each of the above embodiments, the keyhole surface 186 of the setting key cylinder 180 and the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A (lid case 410) are provided on the same plane. They do not have to be completely flush with each other as long as they do not protrude into the front of the lid case 410 or are clearly recessed in front of the lid case 410 . That is, it is sufficient that the keyhole surface 186 and the rear surface 410a are substantially coplanar. The term “substantially flush” includes the case of being substantially on the same plane and the case of being completely on the same plane.

In each of the above embodiments, the game machine is configured to determine the transition to the high-probability state based on the type of winning jackpot symbol. It may be configured as a game machine that controls to a high probability state based on. In each of the above forms, once controlled to a high probability state, the game machine continues to be controlled to a high probability state until the start of the next jackpot game (so-called variable loop type game machine). It may be configured as a game machine with a variable number of cuts) or a falling machine (a game machine in which the high probability state ends depending on the lottery result). Also, it may be configured as a so-called one-kind-two-kind machine, or a honeycomb type game machine. In other words, the invention shown in this specification can be preferably applied to gaming machines with various game characteristics regardless of the game characteristics of the gaming machines.

In addition, it is possible to configure as follows in a pachinko game machine which is not controlled to a high-probability state like, for example, a 1-type 2-type mixed machine. That is, among the big hit determination tables, there is no table corresponding to the high probability state (high probability table), and only the table corresponding to the normal probability state (normal table) is provided. In the table corresponding to the normal probability state, a common lower limit judgment value (common lower limit judgment value) for judging a big hit is stored regardless of each set value. The upper limit judgment value (normal upper limit judgment value) for judging whether it is a big hit or not may be stored respectively. Alternatively, the table corresponding to the normal probability state stores a common upper limit determination value (common upper limit determination value) for determining a jackpot regardless of each setting value, while corresponding to each setting value A lower limit judgment value (ordinary upper limit judgment value) for judging a big win may be stored.

Also, as a special game, a small winning game (a special game in which the total opening time of the big winning opening is as short as a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds) or less) may be performed. A state in which a small winning game is being executed is called a small winning game state.

In addition, there may be a plurality of (for example, two) large winning openings (large winning devices). In this case, a first big winning hole, a first big winning hole sensor capable of detecting a game ball that has won the first big winning hole, a second big winning hole, and a game that has won the second big winning hole The game machine is provided with a second big winning hole sensor capable of detecting a ball.

In each of the above embodiments, four random numbers such as a jackpot random number are obtained as random numbers (determination information) obtained based on the winning of the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. A random number may be obtained and based on the random number, whether or not the game is a big win, the type of win, the presence or absence of reach, and the type of variation pattern may be determined. That is, it is possible to arbitrarily set the number of random numbers to be obtained based on the starting prize and what is determined in each random number.

In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko game machine is controlled to a jackpot game state (special game state) under the control condition that a jackpot has been won and a special symbol indicating that has been stopped and displayed. On the other hand, it may be configured as a slot machine (rotary type game machine, pachislot game machine).

Also, any type of slot machine may be used. In the case of a so-called normal machine (type A slot machine) that increases the number of medals obtained by winning a big bonus or regular bonus, the state in which the big bonus or regular bonus is executed corresponds to the special game state. In addition, if it is a so-called ART machine or AT machine that increases the medals acquired during a special game period such as ART (Assist Replay Time) or AT (Assist Time) that can frequently win small roles, the state during ART or AT corresponds to the special game state. In addition, in normal machines, the control condition for the special game state is that after winning the big bonus or regular bonus, each combination of symbols that triggers the transition to the big bonus or regular bonus is placed on the activated pay line. It is to be derived and displayed as a reel display result. Also, in the ART machine and AT machine, the control condition for the special game state is, for example, after winning the execution lottery of ART or AT, reaching the activation timing of ART or AT by digesting the prescribed number of games. be.

15. Inventions Shown in the Above-described Embodiments The above-described embodiments show inventions of the following means. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding structural names and expressions in the above-described embodiments and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means A>
The invention according to means A1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that performs a lottery for whether or not a win is based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition (game ball winning to the first start port 11 or the second start port 12). In the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with
The game control means is
Multiple setting values with different winning probabilities (setting value “1”, setting value “2”, setting value “3”, setting value “4”, setting value “5”, setting value “6”, see FIG. 16) From among them, it is possible to change to one selected setting value,
Suggestion notification means (setting value change lamp 200, image display device 50, see FIGS. 6 and 7),
The suggestion notifying means is
When the suggestion notification is performed, a predetermined end condition (after the set value change lamp 200 is lit, the variable display of the special symbol is started, the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol is fixedly displayed. When the number of times of change reaches 100 times, or the number of times the variable performance is performed after the set value change suggestion performance is executed reaches 100 times), the suggestion notification can be terminated. It is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the power is turned on, there is a case where a suggestive notification is made suggesting that one setting value selected from among a plurality of setting values with different winning probabilities has been changed. , when the suggestive notification is performed, the suggestive notification may be terminated if a predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, when the power is turned on, the suggestive notification is performed, and the game player confirms the suggestive notification to confirm that the set value has been changed before the predetermined condition is established and the suggestive notification ends. It is possible to comprehend. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to the gaming machine in which the game is played first by the suggestive notification based on the power-on.

The invention according to means A2 is
In the gaming machine according to means A1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined end condition is that the variable display of the special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the suggestive notification based on the power-on is performed, the fluctuation tail display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times, and the suggestive notification is sent to the player before the suggestive notification is completed. It is possible to have the user confirm that the setting value has been changed. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game first on a gaming machine in which the variable display of the special symbols has not been performed a predetermined number of times by the suggestive notification based on the power-on.

The invention according to means A3 is
In the gaming machine according to means A1 or means A2,
The game control means is
The game machine is characterized in that the suggestion reporting means is controllable.

If the suggestion notification means is controlled by the performance control means, and the designer changes the control by the presentation control means, the suggestion notification means may not perform the notification in accordance with the change. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine of this configuration, since the suggestive notification means is controlled by the game control means, even if the designer changes the control by the effect control means, it is possible to perform the suggestive notification. , suggesting that the set value has been changed, making it possible for the player to grasp it.

The invention according to means A4 is
In the gaming machine according to means A1 or means A2,
Equipped with production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling a predetermined production,
The production control means is
The game machine is characterized in that the suggestion reporting means is controllable.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the change to one set value selected from a plurality of set values with different winning probabilities is indicated by the effect control means instead of the game control means. Means may suggest that the setting has been changed. As a result, while suppressing the load on the game control means, it is possible to suggest to the player that the set value has been changed, and to make the player understand it.

The invention according to means A5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
The suggestion notifying means is
When changed to a second set value (set value "6", see FIG. 16 (F)) different from the first set value than when changed to the first set value by the game control means, The gaming machine is characterized in that it is easy to perform the suggestion notification (see FIGS. 33(A) and 64(A)).

According to the game machine of this configuration, the suggestive notification by the suggestive notification means is more likely to be performed when the setting value is changed to the second setting value different from the first setting value than when the setting value is changed to the first setting value. . Thus, by making the player confirm the suggestive notification, the player not only grasps that the set value has been changed, but also makes the player guess that the set value has been changed to the second set value different from the first set value. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the first game machine not only by the fact that the suggestive notification is performed by the suggestive notification means but also by the ease with which the suggestive notification is performed.

The invention according to means A6 is
In the gaming machine according to means A5,
Winning probability corresponding to the first set value (set value "1") (jackpot winning probability in low probability state (approximately 1/301), jackpot winning probability in high probability state (approximately 1/30), Fig. 16 (A)), than the winning probability corresponding to the second set value (set value "6") (jackpot winning probability in low probability state (about 1/200), jackpot winning probability in high probability state ( about 1/20), see FIG. 16(F)).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the change to the second setting value corresponding to the winning probability higher than the winning probability corresponding to the first setting value is more likely than the change to the first setting value. , suggestive notification by the suggestive notification means is likely to be performed. As a result, not only is the player confirmed by the suggestive notification to let the player know that the set value has been changed, but also by performing the suggestive notification, the winning probability is higher than the winning probability corresponding to the first set value. It is possible to make an assumption that the second set value has been changed to correspond to a high winning probability. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game first by guessing that the second setting value has been changed to the second setting value corresponding to the winning probability higher than the winning probability corresponding to the first setting value. It becomes possible.

The invention according to means A7 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6,
The suggestion notifying means is
A second set value (set value "6", different from the first set value than when it is changed to the first set value (set value "1", see FIG. 16 (A)) by the game control means 16(F)), it is easier to end the suggestive notification (see FIGS. 63(B) and 69(B)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the suggestive notification is more likely to end when the second setting value different from the first setting value is changed than when the setting value is changed to the first setting value. As a result, by having the player confirm the suggestive notification, not only is the player aware that the set value has been changed, but also the second set value different from the first set value can be set depending on how easily the suggestive notification ends. It is possible to make an assumption that it may have been changed. Therefore, the suggestive notification by the suggestive notifying means and the easiness of termination of the suggestive notification can motivate the player to the gaming machine in which the game is first played, and contribute to the operation of the gaming machine. .

The invention according to means A8 is
In the gaming machine according to means A7,
Winning probability corresponding to the first set value (set value "1") (jackpot winning probability in low probability state (approximately 1/301), jackpot winning probability in high probability state (approximately 1/30), Fig. 16 (A)), than the winning probability corresponding to the second set value (set value "6") (jackpot winning probability in low probability state (about 1/200), jackpot winning probability in high probability state ( about 1/20), see FIG. 16(F)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the change to the second set value, which is a winning probability higher than the winning probability corresponding to the first set value, is more effective than the change to the first set value. Suggestion notification is likely to end. This not only allows the player to confirm the suggestive notification and allows the player to grasp that the set value has been changed, but also makes it easier to terminate the suggestive notification, thereby making the winning probability higher than the winning probability corresponding to the first set value. It is possible to make an assumption that the second set value has been changed to correspond to a high winning probability. Therefore, by guessing that the second setting value corresponding to the winning probability higher than the winning probability corresponding to the first setting value is changed, the player is motivated to the gaming machine to play the game for the first time. It is possible to contribute to the operation of the game machine.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-201058, a stage exhibiting a high probability expectation level is selected based on power-on, and the selected stage is displayed on the display screen of the image display device. there is With this configuration, by confirming the stage displayed on the display screen of the image display device, it is possible for the player to be motivated to play the game machine for the first time. However, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game first by other configurations, not limited to the configuration performed in the pachinko gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 above. . Therefore, the invention according to means A1 to A8 is based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition for the game machine described in JP-A-2010-201058. It is possible to change to one set value selected from among a plurality of set values with different winning probabilities, and when the power is turned on, the game control means makes a suggestive notification suggesting that the set value has been changed. is provided, and the suggestive notification means is different in that when the suggestive notification is performed, the suggestive notification can be terminated when a predetermined condition is established. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine capable of motivating the player to play the game for the first time (producing an action and effect).

PY1...Pachinko machine 40k...Direction button (input part)
50... Image display device 50a... Display screen 54... Board lamp 100... Game control board 101... Game control microcomputer 102... Game CPU
104: RAM for games
120... Production control board 121... Production control microcomputer 200... Set value change lamp 212... Frame lamp 300... 7 segment display 620... Speaker

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine provided with game control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not a win is made based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition,
The game control means is
It is possible to change to one set value selected from among a plurality of set values with different winning probabilities,
Suggestion notification means capable of performing suggestion notification suggesting that the set value has been changed by the game control means based on power-on,
The suggestion notifying means is
When the suggestive notification is performed, the suggestive notification can be terminated when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times ,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is easier to end the suggestive notification when the game control means changes to a second set value different from the first set value than when the game control means changes to the first set value. .

Images